Professional Documents
Culture Documents
0 TECHNICAL HDBK
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
HANDBOOK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
QUICK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1 DOCUMENT GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.2 Handbook applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.3 Purpose of the handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.4 Handbook Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.5 Handbook history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.5.1 List of the editions and modified parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.5.2 Notes on Ed.01A–DRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.5.3 Notes on Ed.01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.5.4 Notes on Ed.02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.5.5 Notes on Ed.03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.6 List Of Symbols And Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.2 Introduction to the 9600LSY Radio System Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2.2.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2.2.2 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2.2.3 9600LSY basic configurations and Network Element types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.2.4 Main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.2.5 Network applications of the 9600LSY equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.3 Introduction to system configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2.3.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2.3.2 Station types and configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
9600LSY REL.1.0/2.0
LHR
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
ED 03
514
2.3.3 Channel configurations and protection schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
2.4 Hardware components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2.4.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2.4.2 OPTINEX Rack and Top Rack Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
ED 03
514
3.6.6 MODEM unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
3.6.7 PSU and PSF units operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
3.6.8 Additional Housekeeping unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
3.6.9 Kit Loudspeaker operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
ED 03
514
5.4.4 STM–1 optical module description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
5.4.5 128QAM MODEM “STM1– 1WST” and “STM0– 0WST” description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
5.4.6 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
5.5 Transceiver subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
7 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
7.2 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
7.2.1 EMC norms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
7.2.2 Safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
7.2.3 Maintenance Personnel skill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
7.3 Instruments and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
7.3.1 Software tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
7.4.2 Station Alarms (TRU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
7.4.3 Unit alarms managed by System Controller (SYSCO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
7.4.4 Alarm visual indications on units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
7.4.5 Summarizing / Housekeeping Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
9 9640LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
9.1 9640LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
9.2 9640LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
10 9647LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
10.1 9647LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
10.2 9647LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
11 9662LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
11.1 9662LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
11.2 9662LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
12 9667LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
12.1 9667LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
12.2 9667LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
13 9674LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
13.1 9674LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
13.2 9674LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
14 9681LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
14.1 9681LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
14.2 9681LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
15 9610LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
15.1 9610LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
15.2 9610LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
16 9611LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
16.1 9611LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
16.2 9611LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
ED 03
514
17 9613LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
17.1 9613LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
17.2 9613LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
ED 03
514
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES
FIGURES
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
Fig. 1. Backbone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
ED 03
514
Fig. 48. G.703 64 Kbit/s co–directional interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Fig. 49. RS422 A V11/V24 64 Kbit/s contra–directional interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Fig. 50. RS232C V24/V28 asynchronous interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Fig. 51. Synchronization Reference Source Priority Algorithm Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
ED 03
514
Fig. 98. System cabling: types of used cables (A, B, C, D, E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Fig. 99. System cabling: types of used cables (F, G, H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Fig. 100. System cabling: types of used cables (K, N, P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Fig. 101. System cabling: types of used cables (KK, NN, PP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
Fig. 147. Block diagram of “Up to 7+1 Terminal configuration Tx side” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Fig. 148. Block diagram of “Up to 7+1 Terminal configuration Rx side” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Fig. 149. RRA–CHANNEL block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Fig. 150. RRA STANDBY block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
ED 03
514
Fig. 151. STM–1 optical module – block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Fig. 152. MODEM block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Fig. 153. SERVICE block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Fig. 154. Switch logic N+1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
ED 03
514
Fig. 201. Transceiver internal connectors for repair 6/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Fig. 202. Repair form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Fig. 203. 9640 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R Recommendation F.635. fig.3/Annex 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Fig. 204. 9640 LSY Channel plan B: – ITU–R F.635 recommends 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
Fig. 205. 9640 LSY Channel plan C: ITU–R Recommendation F.382 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 206. 9640 LSY Channel plan D: ITU–R F. 382 (Extended ) Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Fig. 207. 9640 LSY Channel plan E: DTI channel plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Fig. 208. 9640 LSY Channel plan F: ITU–R Recommendation F.635, Annex 1, fig.6 . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Fig. 209. 9640 LSY Channel plan G: O.I.R.T. (Russia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Fig. 210. 9647 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R Recommendation F.1099, Annex 1, fig. 2 . . . . . . . . . 426
Fig. 211. 9647 LSY Channel plan B: Spain Defence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Fig. 212. 9662 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F 383 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Fig. 213. 9662 LSY Channel plan B: O.I.R.T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Fig. 214. 9667 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F.384, CEPT T/R 14–02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Fig. 215. 9674 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F.385 Annex 3 L&H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Fig. 216. 9674 LSY Channel plan B: ITU–R F.385 Annex 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Fig. 217. 9674 LSY Channel plan C: ITU–R F.385 Annex 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Fig. 218. 9674 LSY Channel plan D: ITU–R F.385 Rec. 1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Fig. 219. 9674 LSY Channel plan E: ITU–R F.385 Rec. 1M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Fig. 220. 9674 LSY Channel plan F: ITU–R F.385 Rec. 1H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Fig. 221. 9681 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F.386 ANNEX 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Fig. 222. 9681 LSY Channel plan B: ITU–R F.386 ANNEX 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Fig. 223. 9681 LSY Channel plan C: ITU–R F.386 ANNEX 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Fig. 224. 9610 LSY Channel plan A: MEDIASET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Fig. 225. 9611 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F.387 rec. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Fig. 226. 9611 LSY Channel plan B: ITU–R F.387 ANNEX 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Fig. 227. 9613 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F.497 Rec.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Fig. 228. Example of SWP Release and Version numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Fig. 229. Example of Product levels and associated Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Fig. 230. Antistatic protection device kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Fig. 231. LSY equipment identification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Fig. 232. Large–subrack labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Fig. 233. Small–subrack labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Fig. 234. Labels on units with standard cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Fig. 235. Modules label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Fig. 236. Internal label for Printed Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Fig. 237. Back panels internal label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Fig. 238. Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Fig. 239. Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
TABLES
Tab. 1. Quick guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Tab. 2. Handbook history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Tab. 3. List Of Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Tab. 4. List Of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Tab. 5. 9600LSY radio family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Tab. 6. 9600LSY user interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Tab. 7. LHR Terminal Regenerator System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Tab. 8. Couples of Radio Channels that can be used for protected service channels and WST . . 50
Tab. 9. OH bytes suitable for handling on MST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Tab. 10. OH bytes suitable for handling on RST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
Tab. 14. Rack and shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Tab. 15. TRU breaker utilization in 9600 LSY/LHR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Tab. 16. System Controller card equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Tab. 17. Additional Housekeeping unit equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
ED 03
514
Tab. 63. Relationship between Remote and Station Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Tab. 64. Spare parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Tab. 65. Normal condition (no alarms) of LEDs on equipment’s units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Tab. 66. Transceiver internal cabling diagram according to configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
Tab. 67. Implemented radio–frequency channel arrangements and list of Chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
ED 03
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
14 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
QUICK GUIDE
955.203.292 Q
Chapter 1 – Document Guide
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
SECTION CONTENT
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
21
20
17
16
PAGE
HANDBOOK GUIDE
15 / 514
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
a) Warranty
b) Information
The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information
purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the
part of ALCATEL.
c) Copyright Notification
The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied,
reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
d) Safety recommendations
The safety recommendations here below must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or
damage to the equipment:
1) Service Personnel
Installation and service must be carried out by authorized people having appropriate technical
training and experience necessary to be aware of hazardous operations during installation and
service and of measures to avoid any danger to them, to any other people and to the equipment.
3) Safety norms
Recommended safety norms are indicated in this manual as described in para.19.3 on pages
484 on.
Local safety regulations must be used if mandatory. Safety instructions in this handbook should
be used in addition to the local safety regulations. In the case of conflict between safety
instructions stated in this manual and those indicated in local regulations, mandatory local
norms will prevail. Should not local regulations be mandatory, then safety norms in this manual
will prevail.
ED 03
514
QUICK GUIDE
N.B. In the documentation on CD–ROM, this table represent hyperlinks to the referenced parts.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
logically configure a station (or – units in BaseBand shelf, read para.3.6.1 on page 135
change its configuration) and
– units in Transceiver shelf, read para.3.7.2 on page 156
logically provision equipment boards
– units in FANS shelf, read para.3.9.1 & 3.9.2 on page 169
have details on system cabling read chapter 4 starting on page 175 of this handbook
Tab. 1. continues ..
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
.. continues Tab. 1.
If you need immediate operative information on how to:
carry out unit hardware setting read para.20.2 on page 507 of this handbook
Tab. 1. continues ..
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
.. continues Tab. 1.
If you need immediate operative information on how to:
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
physically install and cable the get Installation Handbook (Ref.[E] on page 469) and
equipment hardware proceed as specified by it
for:
MAINTENANCE
provision and manage spare parts read para.7.5 on page 370 of this handbook
carry out routine maintenance read para.7.6 on page 373 of this handbook
carry out corrective maintenance read para.7.7 on page 375 of this handbook
To find any other kind of information not listed in the above table, please start reading para.1.4 on page
23, and then search the information according to the handbook structure described.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
SAFETY–EMC–ESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING
a) Please refer to Chapter 19 on page 483 to obtain details regarding following information:
Risk of explosion
Microwave radiations
b) Identical or similar information on Personal Computer, Work–Station etc., other than ALCATEL’s,
loaded with software applications described in this or other Handbooks, is supplied in the
Constructor’s technical documentation.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
1 DOCUMENT GUIDE
1.1 Introduction
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
This chapter contains all information regarding this handbook and is organized as follows:
document, use and communication of its contents
9610LSY 1.00.00 –– ––
(10 – 10.7 GHz) 2.00.00 3DB 04288 AAAA 522.171.920
– LHR Regenerator
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
1.3 Purpose of the handbook
This handbook belongs to the Customer Documentation set envisaged for the equipment specified in para.
1.2 on page 21.
With reference to equipment configuration stated in para.1.2 on page 21, this handbook provides the
following pieces of information:
– system description on two levels: first level and detailed level, both from system, hardware and
software points of view
– system hardware structure: item Part Numbers and equipping rules (provisioning)
– unit operative hardware description: access point description (usage of led, pushbuttons, switches
and connectors for Customer use), connection rules, hardware setting options
– system cabling
N.B. In any case, the C.T. Operator’s Handbook must be always available to the Operator in
charge of the equipment troubleshooting and repair, as it contains the information
necessary to carry out troubleshooting through the Craft Terminal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
1.4 Handbook Structure
This handbook is composed by a ’main handbook’ and ’enclosed documents’. Information is divided into
the following main sections and levels as detailed in the table of contents:
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
MAIN HANDBOOK
N.B. A summary description of the contents is given at the beginning of each chapter.
INFORMATIVE LEVEL OPERATIVE LEVEL
SECTION HANDBOOK GUIDE
– Quick Guide
It allows to access immediately the most
– Chapter 1 – Document Guide frequently needed operative pieces of
It contains all information regarding this information contained in this handbook, in its
handbook. enclosed documents and in other related
handbooks.
SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
It describes all the equipment general and detailed system features including its application in the
telecommunication network. Furthermore, it supplies the equipment description and specifications. The
description is organized in the following levels:
– Chapter 2 – System Description
It gives the first–level description of 9600LSY – Chapter 3 – Physical Configuration
equipment in both LHR Regenerator and It gives detailed operative information
WMSN (LHR+1650SM–C) configurations. regarding LHR Regenerator configuration
The information given should be enough to only:
understand the equipment composition and • the equipment’s items (P/Ns, equipping
operation and to read the operative level rules, labels for remote inventory)
chapters as well as the description second • their physical and logical position in the
level system
• the unit assembly/subassembly and
front panel drawings, with the usage
description of the access points
(connectors, visual indicators, buttons)
• hardware setting description
• summary and operative information on
characteristics of external interfaces
Regenerator configuration
table continues
ED 03
514
table continues
.. continues MAIN HANDBOOK
INFORMATIVE LEVEL OPERATIVE LEVEL
– Chapter 7 – Maintenance
It describes the routine and corrective
maintenance of 9600USY equipment in the
LHR Regenerator configuration.
– Each one of the subsequent chapters ’x’ is devoted to a specific 96xxLSY product and includes
two main paragraphs:
• x.1 – 96xxLSY part list: the Part Numbers and the Remote Inventory Labels of the
frequency–dependent items (Transceivers) are given;
• x.2 – 96xxLSY frequency plans: the various frequency plans envisaged are described.
SECTION APPENDICES
ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS
INFORMATIVE LEVEL OPERATIVE LEVEL
a) documents related to hardware setting
options of the units for which they are
envisaged
b) documents describing branching configurations (branching drawings and
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
branching–tranceivers connections)
ED 03
514
1.5 Handbook history
The following Tab. 2. indicates the handbook parts new and modified with respect to the previous edition.
The revision bars on the table’s rows indicate changes in the structure (e.g. new sections, or information
shifted within the handbook) with respect to the previous edition.
ÉÉÉ
2.1. Introduction n
2.2. Introduction to the 9600 LSY Radio System Family n m m
2.3. Introduction to system configurations n m m
2.4. Hardware components n m m
2.5. Configurations n m m
2.6. Radio Transmission features n m
2.7. Signal Transmission n m m
2.8. Synchronization n
2.9. Equipment Control n m
3. PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION n
3.1. Introduction n m m
3.2. Part list n m m
3.3. Rack and shelves summary n m
3.4. Top Rack Unit (TRU)
ÉÉÉ n m
3.5. Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR
shelves ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
n m
table continues
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
ÉÉ
Tab. 2. Handbook history
HANDBOOK EDITION ⇒ 01 02 03 04 05
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
4. SYSTEM CABLING n
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
6.1. Introduction n
6.2. System Characteristics n m
6.3. Transceiver Characteristics n m
6.4. Regenerator and Modem Characteristics
6.5. Branching interfaces
ÉÉ
n
ÉÉ n
6.6. Protections n
6.7. Environmental characteristics n m m
6.8. Optical Safety n m
MAINTENANCE n
7. MAINTENANCE
ÉÉ
n
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
7.1. Introduction n
7.2. Warnings n m
7.3. Instruments and accessories n m
7.4. Alarm Description n m
7.5. Set of spare parts n m m
7.6. Routine Maintenance n m
7.7. Corrective Maintenance n m m
7.8. Faulty unit repair and Repair Form n m
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
table continues
ED 03
514
Tab. 2. Handbook history
HANDBOOK EDITION ⇒ 01 02 03 04 05
FREQUENCY PLANS & PART NUMBERS n m
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
8. INTRODUCTION TO SECTION n m m
9. 9640 LSY n m
10. 9647 LSY n m
11. 9662 LSY n m
12. 9667 LSY n m
13. 9674 LSY n m
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
14. 9681 LSY n m
15. 9610 LSY
16. 9611 LSY
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
n
n
m
17. 9613 LSY
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
n m
ÉÉÉ
APPENDICES n
ÉÉÉ
18. DOCUMENTATION GUIDE n
18.1. Introduction
18.2. Product–release–version handbook ÉÉÉ n
n
m m
18.3. General on Alcatel Customer Documentation
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
n m
ÉÉÉ
19. SAFETY–EMC–ESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING n
ÉÉÉ
19.1. Introduction n
19.2. Compliance with European Norms n
19.3. Safety Rules n m m
19.4. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms) n m
19.5. Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges n m
19.6. Suggestions, notes and cautions n
19.7. Labels affixed to the Equipment n m
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES n
20. HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES n
20.1. Introduction n
20.2. Hardware setting documents explanation n
20.3. List of enclosed documents (N.B.) n m m
N.B. the list of the enclosed documents is not stated in this table. The enclosed documents are listed
in Tab. 90. on page 511 and Tab. 91. on page 513.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
1.5.2 Notes on Ed.01A–DRAFT
Ed.01A created on October 23, 2001 is the first NEITHER validated NOR officially released issue.
ED 03
514
1.6 List Of Symbols And Abbreviations
N.B. This Table Lists Some Symbols Whose Interpretation Could Be Doubtful.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
H V
POLARIZATION can be assumed as either horizontal or vertical
SYMBOLS H
Once you have decided a polarization (e.g. )
the opposite direction symbol will be opposite polarization (e.g. )
V
ABBREVIATION MEANING
A
AC Alternate Current
ACSE Association Control Service Element
ADC Analog to Digital Converter
ADM Add Drop Multiplexer
AE Access Enable
AF Atomic Function
AGC Automatic Gain Control
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown
AMI Alternate Mark Inversion
ANSI American National Standard Institute
AOW Additional Order Wire
API Access Point Identifier
APS Automatic Protection Switching
ASE Application Service Element
ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
AT Attend alarm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
ABBREVIATION MEANING
ATTD ATTendeD
AUG Administration Unit Group
B
BB Base Band
BBE Background Block Error
BCA Common Battery Dial Pulsing (Telephone Set)
BER Bit Error Rate
BIP–x Bit Interleaved Parity – x
C
CAN Controller Area Network (communication protocol patented by Robert
Bosch GmbH)
CCDP Co–Channel Dual Polarized (Frequency re–use)
CFRD Component Failure Rate Date
C/I Carrier to Interference ratio
CK Clock
CMI Code Mark Inversion
CMISE Common Management Information Service Element
CPU Central Processor Unit
CRC–n Cyclic Redundancy Check – n
CRU Clock Reference Unit
CSW Common SoftWare
CTP Connection Termination Point
D
DA Distant Alarm
DC Direct Current
DCC Data Communication Channels (D1–D12)
DCC/M Multiplex Section DCC (D4–D12)
DCC/R Regenerator Section DCC (D1–D3)
DCN Data Communication Network
DEFEC FEC Decoder
DEM Demodulator
DF Dialog Failure
DIV Diversity
DM Degraded Minute
DS Defect Second
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
ABBREVIATION MEANING
EB Error Block
EBC Errored Block Count
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
EC Equipment Controller
ECC Embedded Control Channel
ECS External Communication Service
ECT Equipment Craft Terminal
EE Equipment Engineering
EF Equipment Failure
EIA Electronic Industries Association
EMC ElectroMagnetic Compatibility
EMF Equipment Management Function
EOW Engineering Order Wire
EPS Equipment Protection Switching
ES Error Second
ETR European Telecommunication Report
ETS European Telecommunication Standard
ETSI European Telecommunication Standard Institute
EW Early Warning
EWH Early Warning High
EWL Early Warning Low
EXC–BER Excessive BER
F
FE Front End
FEBE Far End Block Error
FEC Forward Error Correction (Code)
FERF Far End Receiver Failure
FIT Failure Unit
FR Failure rate
FSRC Failed Switch Request Count
FSRD Failed Switch Request Duration
G
GB Ground Benign
GF Ground Fixed
GM Ground Mobile
H
HBER High Bit Error Rate
HDLC High level Data Link Control
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
ABBREVIATION MEANING
HK HouseKeeping
HPT High order Path Termination
ED 03
514
ABBREVIATION MEANING
MS Multiplex Section
MSA Multiplex Section Adaptation
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
ED 03
514
ABBREVIATION MEANING
PSAC Protection Switch Count
PSAD Protection Switch Actual Duration
ED 03
514
ABBREVIATION MEANING
SF Signal Failure
SNCP Sub Network Connection Protection
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
UG Urgent Alarm
UHM Urban Haul split mount terminal Multiplexer
ED 03
514
ABBREVIATION MEANING
UHR Urban Haul split mount terminal Regenerator
USK Stackable Unit
ED 03
514
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
DESCRIPTIONS
ED 03
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
38 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
2.1 Introduction
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
This chapter gives the first–level description of 9600LSY equipment in the LHR configuration, and
comprehends the following main paragraphs:
ED 03
514
2.2 Introduction to the 9600LSY Radio System Family
2.2.1 Foreword
2.2.2 General
The 9600LSY digital radio relay system belongs to the second generation of the Alcatel SDH
(Synchronous Digital Hierarchy ) radio family that has been developed aiming to match the demand of
high quality microwave transmission links and following the SDH standards defined by International
Organizations as ITU–T, ITU–R and ETSI. Special attention concerning the network management
standards and its integration into a SDH based network has been paid.
Big efforts have been done to expand as much as possible the versatility of the new radio family and the
full compatibility with the optical systems to ensure the utilization of the radio media as natural complement
to the optical fibre transmission.
A 9600LSY radio system can be in fact utilized either with multiplex section termination (MST) or
regenerator section termination (RST) functionality, can be used for optical loop closures or for fibre optic
back–up, for spurs or for backbone links and, in general, in all the network interconnections where the
advantages due to an easy installation, a fast commissioning operations and time and cost saving solution
are requested.
The family supports radio transmission of STM–0 (51 Mbps) and STM–1 (155 Mbps) signals as well
STM–4 (622 Mbps) or STM–16 (2.4 Gbps) connections, using a proper number of radio frequency
channels in various configurations.
By means of the new 9600LSY family, Alcatel intends to answer the growing demand of transmission
capacity either for traditional telephone services or for the new data–oriented services (including ATM +
IP networks, LAN/WAN networks) or for the evolution of the cellular market.
The Alcatel 9600LSY system architecture, based on a full indoor structure, covers all the frequency bands
from 4 to 13 GHz in a complete set of equipment configurations from 2 to 8 channels in protected (N+1)
or unprotected (N+0) radio configurations.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
2.2.3 9600LSY basic configurations and Network Element types
This radio system is basically composed by a rack containing up to eight transceivers, eight
modemodulators and eight RRA, and can be configured as follows:
N+1
1+1 7+1
with/without occasional traffic
This handbook deals with the LHR and related WMSN configurations only. For LHRC please make
reference to the specific handbook (that has a different P/N, see Tab. 77. on page 467).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
2.2.4 Main features
Th Alcatel 9600LSY family exploits the experience gained with the previous SDH generations of radio
equipment and provides an innovative answer to the most recent market requirements:
– Full integration in the Alcatel network management platform able to manage different types of
network elements belonging to different technologies: OMSN, LT, OMSG, microwave radios, optical
systems and submarine systems. 9600LSY is included in Alcatel network release plan, guaranteeing
consistent feature support and allowing, in case of existing SDH NEs, not to change TMN platform,
thus saving investments already done.
– Double identity of the equipment that can be inserted in the SDH network as:
– Transmission capacity easily selectable between STM0 and STM1 according to the bandwidth
availability and, if necessary, following an incremental approach.
– Bit rate capacity: the 9600LSY family allows the transmission of STM–1 signals for all frequency
bands from 4 to 13 GHz and STM–0 for 7, 8 and 13 GHz bands, according to the customer needs.
The system allows an easy migration from STM–0 to STM–1 (only hardware and software
pre–settings are necessary) when the traffic and the band requirements are going to change.
Auxiliary traffic can be added by means of RFCOH bytes corresponding to one 2 Mbit/s Way Side
Traffic in STM–1 case. Way Side Traffic in STM–0 case is not available.
– Usage of 128 QAM as standard modulation. The high number of levels utilised allows to obtain a high
spectrum efficiency that permits the utilisation of the following channel spacing :
• 28 MHz, 29 MHz, 29.65 MHz, 30 MHz and 40 MHz for STM–1 capacity
• 14 MHz for STM–0 capacity.
– Adoption of frequency reuse technique as option for all the supported frequency bands, allowing
the transmission of 2x STM–1 per channel: the way utilised to improve the spectrum efficiency is
based on the Co–Channel Dual Polarisation (CCDP) technique.
This technique, consisting in transmitting two different STM–1 channels on each radio channel
utilising two different antenna polarisation, has been consolidated in the recent past by means of field
proven results.
In order to meet ITU–R transmission quality objectives also in unfavourable propagation condition
causing XPD degradation, Cross–polar Interface Canceller (XPIC) device is adopted to minimise the
negative effects of the cross–polar interference signal, assuring an improvement factor of approx.
18 dB to the cross polar antenna discrimination.
The function is implemented in an optional additional card to be plugged on each couple of
demodulator boards of reused channel.
Particular attention has been paid to the scalability of the system, allowing the extension of a
deployed alternate polar (AP) system to a CCDP reused system only when necessary and
consequently to a progressive investment.
Two possible ways of extension and configurations are available:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
The frequency reuse is applicable to STM–1 streams in all the frequency bands and with all the
channel spacing foreseen in the ITU–R recommendations, while it is not available in case of STM–0
transmission.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
– Space Diversity reception as countermeasure against fading exploiting the new baseband
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
combiner.
– Protections:
Different protection types are available for the 9600LSY systems: Radio Protection and Network
Protection:
• Network Protection.
For network protection the radio system in regenerator section configuration (RRA) will be fully
transparent to APS channel and criteria allowing the OMSNs present in the network to perform
the network protection activity. On the other hand the radio system in multiplex section
configuration (WMSN) implements, as embedded function, network protection features like
Trail protection and sub–network protection (APS, SNC–P etc.).
– High integration of the full indoor structure with very compact size: configurations up to 8+0/7+1
terminal are housed inside a single N3 ETSI rack.
The characteristics Alcatel 9600LSY are compliant with current SDH standards defined within the
International Organisations ITU–T, ITU–R and ETSI, with special attention to those standards concerning
the network management and its integration into SDH based network.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
The 9600LSY series features the 128 QAM modulation offering excellent spectrum efficiency and covering
the following frequency bands:
In general, the equipment of this family may work, in case of for STM–1 stream, in co–channel frequency
re–use operation (CCDP), utilizing the XPIC optional kit, allowing the transmission of 2 x STM–1 signals
on a single RF channel.
Reused configurations are not foreseen for STM–0 capacity.
In the following Tab. 6. the available users interfaces are listed depending on the 9600LSY station types
(Regenerator or WMSN).
X
63 x 2 Mbit/s G.703 ––– ––– X
(21 x 2 Mbit/s)
ED 03
514
2.2.5 Network applications of the 9600LSY equipment
The new generation of radio transmission system Alcatel 9600LSY family is specifically designed to
provide a radio solution suitable for a large number of applications, including:
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
WLT WLT
Fig. 1. Backbone
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
Ring closure STM16
2x(8+0 / 8+1)
ADM ADM
ADM
RADIO RADIO
REG. REG.
RADIO
REG.
RADIO RADIO
REG. REG.
ADM
ADM ADM
ADM
ED 03
514
2.3 Introduction to system configurations
2.3.1 Foreword
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
This paragraph introduces the system composition of the 9600LSY Radio System Family, and
comprehends the following main paragraphs:
The handbook part that should be read before starting this paragraph is:
Station types
A complete terminal station utilizing a maximum of 8 radio channels is housed inside a single ETSI rack
that, depending on the customer request, can be 2200 or 2000 mm high. The 1800 mm rack cannot be
utilized.
The structure of the equipment has been developed aiming to obtain a very simple structure, with an
integration as high as possible and reducing at the minimum the number of different functional blocks
and, inside each of them, reducing the number of different units and cards.
These concepts have led to obtain an equipment structure only composed by the following functional
blocks (see Fig. 4. on page 48):
– a radio assembly containing all the radio frequency and medium frequency circuits (transceiver shelf)
– a baseband subrack containing all the unit devoted to the modulation and demodulation functions,
RRA functions, services management, radio protection switching and system controlling.
– a branching unit deployed at the top and bottom sides of the transceiver subrack.
– a Top Rack Unit (T.R.U.) for D.C.. primary power distribution and battery protection.
– a compact ADM 1650SMC with its additional fan subrack, that , when required, can be installed into
the rack to perform all the functionalities managed by a multiplex section.
The configurations are easily expansible, passing from a lower one to a higher one simply adding, inside
each functional block, the units needed to support the new radio channels utilized.
In particular, the branching unit is equipped in advance with the channel circulators needed for the
expansion up to 7+1, to consent to expand the radio terminal just connecting the RF filters to the branching,
without the necessity to disassemble the branching itself.
Thanks to a new design of narrow RF filters , the frequency reuse, available in all the frequency bands,
can be obtained avoiding the utilization of the –3 dB hybrids for all the bands and all the frequency
spacings, including 28 MHz.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Despite to the new high integration of the LSY systems and thanks to volume decrease obtained on the
branching, the space diversity optional functionality is supplied in all the configuration up to 7+1/8+0.
ED 03
514
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
TRU TRU
ADDITIONAL
HOUSEKEEPING
1650
(optional)
SM–C
SHELF
FANS FOR
1650SM–C
RRA/MODEM RRA/MODEM
AND ACCESS AND ACCESS
AREA AREA
(BASEBAND (BASEBAND
SHELF) FANS FOR SHELF)
RRA/MODEM
Rx Rx
BRANCHING BRANCHING
TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER
SHELF SHELF
Tx Tx
BRANCHING BRANCHING
REGENERATOR WMSN
The Alcatel 9600LSY systems offer a full set of system configuration and protection schemes to meet any
specific need in a network with a high degree of flexibility.
Two are the envisaged station types, each supplying different functionality:
is needed when the RSOH termination and MSOH transparency are requested. I/O network
interface is STM–1 electrical or optical.
is necessary when a Wireless Multiservice Node (WMSN) (one side or two sides) has to be
implemented. In this case the MST station is used at the terminal ends of the radio link and it gives
the possibility to provide synchronous STM–1 electrical and optical interfaces and plesiochronous
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
The maximum number of plesiochronous interfaces that are alternatively allowed by 1650SMC are
as follows:
• up to 3 cards 4x140 Mb/s. In this case the limitation is introduced by the LSY radio system that
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
• up to 3 cards 3x34 Mb/s , utilizing 3x STM–1 (or 3+1 STM–1 in case of protection) channels radio
side.
• up to 3 cards 3x34 Mb/s, utilizing 3x STM–1 (or 3+1 STM–1 in case of protection) channels radio
side.
• up to 3 cards 21x2 Mb/s , utilizing 1x STM–1 (or 1+1 STM–1 in case of protection) channels radio
side.
In the last three cases, if a single stream 34 Mb/s or 45 Mb/s or 21x2 Mb/s is required, an
underequipped STM–1 is utilized toward the radio baseband and a STM–0 can be adopted for
transmission on air.
Station configurations
The 9600LSY family allows the radio transmission of both STM–1 and STM–0 utilising protected and
unprotected heterofrequency configurations N+0, N+1 type or 2x (N+1)– CCDP.
– Long Haul extendible version N+1/N+2/N+0 terminal WMSN configuration (LHR + 1650SMC)
The high integration level allows to provide several types of configurations allowing to address different
network applications :
An already operating terminal regenerator can be reconfigured as a terminal WMSN simply adding a
1650SMC device to the radio regenerator equipment.
Each configuration is easily expansible to a higher capacity just adding the foreseen expansion kits.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
2.3.3 Channel configurations and protection schemes
The LHR system can interface from two up to eight channels (STM–0/STM1 Electrical or Optical signals
and the corresponding Radio parts) and up to eight WST channels. The system configurations allowed
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
N+1 &
NR. of N+0 N+1 Occasional ALL
channels (1:N)
CH CH CH max WST
1+1 2 unpr.
2 2+0 1+1
& Occ. or 1 prot.
2+1 3 unpr. or
3 3+0 2+1
& Occ. 1 prot.+1 unpr.
3+1 4 unpr. or
4 4+0 3+1
& Occ. 1 prot.+2 unpr.
4+1 5 unpr. or
5 5+0 4+1
& Occ. 1 prot.+3 unpr.
5+1 6 unpr. or
6 6+0 5+1
& Occ. 1 prot.+4 unpr.
6+1 7 unpr. or
7 7+0 6+1
& Occ. 1 prot.+5 unpr.
7+1 8 unpr. or
8 8+0 7+1
& Occ. 1 prot.+6 unpr.
N.B. Further information regarding protection schemes is given in para.5.2.1.5 on page 233.
ED 03
514
2.4 Hardware components
2.4.1 Foreword
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
This paragraph describes the different assemblies and shelves that can be used to compose the available
configurations of 9600LSY family, and comprehends the following main paragraphs:
The handbook part that should be read before starting this paragraph is:
The OPTINEX rack has been designed to be used in all the new applications of optical and radio solutions
thanks to the high room availability needed for the continuously increasing number of cable connections.
The rack is available in two different heights: 2200 and 2000 mm. They both can be used either for
regenerator or WMSN terminals. In fact, also the 2000mm version can host the terminals including the
1650SM–C ADM and its fan unit.
In general, OPTINEX rack can house 19” and 21” subracks. They must be compliant with ETSI 300 119–3
standard. Using 19” subracks they must be installed utilizing mechanical adaptors.
However, in the case of 9600LSY radios, the two main subracks (transceiver and baseband) are 21” wide,
so they do not need any adapter to be installed in the rack.
In the 9600LSY application, OPTINEX rack is usually supplied with the TRU unit (see para.3.4 on page
128).
For special Customer needs, OPTINEX rack can be also supplied without the TRU unit.
This handbook gives no detailed information on OPTINEX rack. For this purpose, please refer
to OPTINEX rack specific documentation (see para.18.2.2.1 on page 471).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
2.4.3 Transceiver subrack
Each transceiver module is inserted in a vertical dedicated slot. The coaxial connections with Rx and Tx
branching units are located at the top and bottom positions of each transceiver.
Each module is equipped with the following units:
– Transmitter
– Receiver
– Tx Local Oscillator
– Rx Local Oscillator
– DC/DC converter
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
2.4.3.2 Transceiver block diagram
A simple block diagram, illustrating the main functions performed by transceiver module, is shown in the
following Fig. 6.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
The transmitter includes an IF amplifier, a SSB up converter, a local oscillator and a RF power amplifier.
The utilization of a high rejection SSB up–converter permits to avoid the use of a RF filter at the output,
allowing a wide–band utilization of the unit.
The Automatic Transmitted Power Control (ATPC) function is included in the transceiver in order to
decrease the Tx power output and dissipation in case of normal propagation and to push the maximum
power up in deep fading conditions. This function may be disabled and the level of the transmitted RF
power can be manually set by Craft Terminal configuration.
The receiver includes a low noise RF preamplifier, an automatic imagine rejection down converter, an IF
filter, a main amplifier with AGC and a local oscillator.
A space diversity receiver, to be used in junction with a baseband signal combiner, is also available as
countermeasure to the selective fading due to the multipath propagation of the signal.
The advantages obtained by the baseband combiner utilization are mainly due to a higher reliability,
thanks to the adopted digital technology, to the possibility of recovering very high delays between the two
received signals and to the very reduced signature of the combined signal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
2.4.4 Baseband subrack
The baseband subrack is used both in regenerator terminal stations and in WMSN stations. In the first case
it is the sole baseband equipment installed in the rack; in the second it has to be associated with
The physical dimensions of the subrack are: 490 mm (w) x 500 mm (h) x 250 mm (d).
ED 03
514
2.4.4.2 Regenerator Terminal Block Diagram
REGENERATOR
RRA BOARD MODEM BOARD
TX
STM1 ELET./OPT. HTL MODEM
MODEM RT
RRA RFCOH
INTERFACE SW RX
AUX. ATPC
SERV. DCCR
V batt. DC/DC
CONVERTER
OS
ECT
The baseband subrack do not allow the protection neither of the physical interface (optical or electrical)
of the channel, neither of the RRA function, because the embedded switching section, included inside
each RRA unit is inserted between the RRA and modem function and therefore it protects only the radio
section (modem and transceiver). See next Fig. 9.
BASEBAND SUBRACK
ED 03
514
Fig. 10. herebelow indicates the slot position of the baseband subrack where the units can be installed
in the various radio configurations.
SYSTEM MODEM
CONTROLLER MM
CONTROLLE
R
POWER
NOT USED SUPPLYSUPPL
Y
BATTERY
FILTER
FILTER
ED 03
514
2.4.4.5 Modem unit
Performs the following main functions:
• Terminal modulator
• Terminal demodulator
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
•
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
XPIC
document, use and communication of its contents
Each modem can be equipped with an optional plug–in board . This board gives the access to the
IF signals necessary to the demodulator for XPIC or for Space Diversity functionalities. In case of
presence of both functions the modem must be equipped with two identical plug–in boards.
Two battery filters, located in the lower side positions of the subrack, supply the DC power to the
common units (System Controller, Service) in 1+1 protected way.
ED 03
514
2.4.5 ADM 1650SM–C
2.4.5.1 WMSN rack configuration
When the Wireless Multi Service Node functionality is requested, an additional 1650SM–C ADM has to
ED 03
514
2.4.5.3 WMSN block diagram
In Fig. 13. , the block diagram of the MST functionality, relevant to a single channel, is shown.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
This configuration, in particular, gives the possibility to manage up to 8 STM–1 channels line–side and to
transmit them radio side with or without radio protection, in the following configurations:
– Up to 7+1 or 8+0 configuration in one direction (OS). The obtained functionality is the one
corresponding to a Line Terminal (LT).
– Up to 4+0 or 4+1 configuration in two different directions (TS). The terminal is configured as a
Wireless Add Drop Multiplexer .
The Compact ADM is built upon a matrix that can accept, through an access module providing the physical
interface for the asynchronous or synchronous signals, a maximum of 63x2 Mb/s, 3x34 Mb/s, 3x45 Mb/s,
140 Mb/s or 155 Mb/s streams.
Inside the ADM, a synchronization unit provides the timing reference needed by all the components of the
network element, with a max. daily drift of 0.37 ppm.
A control sub–system realizes the Synchronous System Management Function (SEMF), according with
ITU–T G.783 recommendation. The sub–system operates with a double controlling system utilizing an
Equipment Controller (EC) for DCC networking and a Shelf Controller (SC) for alarm detection and
reporting, performance monitoring and equipment protection switching.
A wide range of auxiliary service channels is offered according to SDH standards utilizing SDH and POH
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
bytes. These bytes are used for alignment word, parity check, network management operations,
performance monitoring; some data and orderwire channels are available to the user.
ED 03
514
The unit utilizes a power supply distributed architecture where the –48/–60 V battery voltage is distributed
to all the cards and here is DC/DC converted to the voltages necessary to each card.
Two batteries can be used at the input, with automatic selection on the one with higher voltage.
This handbook gives no detailed information on 1650SM–C equipment. For this purpose,
please refer to 1650SM–C specific documentation (see para.18.2.2.2 on page 471) with the
following exception:
In the application for 9600LSY, the FAN SHELF used for 1650SM–C is not
that described in the 1650SM–C documentation, but that described in this
handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
2.4.6 FANS Subrack
The usage of the fan unit inside the rack is mandatory to respect Safety international standards and the
utilization is compulsory in all the system configurations, either in regenerator and WMSN case.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
The FANS subrack is developed to be used both in regenerator and in WMSN configurations. In the first
case it is installed only between the baseband subrack and the transceiver assembly, just above the
receiving branching.
In the second case a second fan subrack is moreover installed in the higher part of the rack, just under
the 1650 M–C unit.
The subrack, 600mm wide and 50 mm high, can contain one or two sub–units with 4 fans each as shown
in the Fig. 14. herebelow.
As a general rule, a subunit must be equipped when there are boards over their ventilation area.
ED 03
514
2.4.7 System wiring
a) Internal connections
Four different connection kits have been designed to cover all the needed system configurations:
b) External connections
Main signal interfaces of the terminal are present on the front panel of each RRA unit.
Alarm interconnections are directly present in the access area of baseband subrack and no
distributor board is foreseen neither in baseband nor in TRU subrack.
ED 03
514
2.5 Configurations
2.5.1 Foreword
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
This paragraph describes in detail the different configurations of 9600LSY family taking into account the
various peculiar aspects, and comprehends the following main paragraphs:
As far as Fan subrack configurations are concerned, refer to para.2.4.6 on page 61.
The handbook parts that should be read before starting this paragraph are:
The 9600LSY family allows the radio transmission of both STM–1 and STM–0 utilizing protected and
unprotected heterofrequency configurations N+0, N+1 or 2x (N+1) CCDP type.
Several types of configurations are available, allowing to address different network applications .
Referred to the maximum rack implementation, the list shows the widest allowed configurations:
The complete list of the possible configurations foreseen for the 9600LSY family is hereafter indicated,
sub–divided in several blocks:
ED 03
514
b) Regenerator configuration utilizing alternate–polar branching solution:
c) Regenerator configuration utilizing single protection channel, installed into a single rack and
with alternate–polar branching solution:
d) Regenerator configuration utilizing double protection, installed into two racks and co–polar
branching solution:
ED 03
514
e) Regenerator configuration utilizing double protection, installed into two racks and
alternate–polar branching solution:
NOTE:
The rack and the subracks have been designed to host up to 10 channels, even if the normal maximum
configuration is limited to 8 channels. In fact, the expansion of the systems without traffic interruption is
available only for this last maximum configuration.
However, it could be possible , for particular customer requirements or utilizing some channel plans, to
foresee even the possibility to get 10 channels per rack.
A terminal can be configured as a WMSN simply adding a 1650SMC device to the radio regenerator
equipment .
Each configuration is easily expansible to higher capacities just adding the foreseen expansion kits.
In Fig. 15. and Fig. 15. , a view of a 8 channel regenerator terminal and 8 channel WMSN are respectively
shown
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 15. 9600LSY 7+1/8+0 regenerator Fig. 16. 9600LSY 7+1/8+0 WMSN
configuration
ED 03
514
In the next Fig. 17. , the block diagram of a 7+1 regenerator is shown.
STM–1 USER
MODEM TRANSCEIVER
Next Fig. 18. shows a block diagram illustrating a Wireless Multiservice Node for 7 x STM–1 channels
transmitted in only one direction (OS) and configured with radio protection implementing a 7+1 radio
configuration.
7X STM–1or 140 or 3x45 or 3x34or 63x2 Mb/s
OMSN REGENERATOR
MODEM TRANSCEIVER
Fig. 18. 9600LSY – WMSN–OS 7x STM–1 configuration with radio protection for 7+1 STM–1
transmission.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
In the next Fig. 19. a Wireless Multiservice Node (east–west) two sides configuration (WMSN–TS) with
four STM–1 streams for each direction is presented with possibility to drop/insert each STM–1 signal.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
ED 03
514
2.5.3 Radio channel configurations
Channel arrangement
H (V) .....
.....
V (H)
H (V) .....
ED 03
514
Frequency Channel assignment according to station layouts
In the following the possible station layouts will be analyzed with the relevant evolutions.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
Fig. 21. shows an example of basic configurations from which the possible evolutions are depicted in
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
channels
1–3–5–7
1 3 5 7
A) O n e p o la r p e r r a c k
BB
(3 + 1)
channels
1–2–3–4
1 2 3 4
B) One polar per rack
BB
(3 + 1)
channels
1–3 1–3 1 3
REUSED C)T w o p o l a r p e r rack
BB (3 + 1 )
f r e q. R e u s e
REUSED
channels
1–2 1–2
1 2
REUSED D) Two polar per rack
BB ( 3 +1)
f r e q. R e u s e
channels
1–3 2–4 1 3
E )Two polar per rack
BB 2 4 (3 + 1)
ED 03
514
Fig. 22. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case A) of previous
Fig. 21. on page 69.
3 5 7
1
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
BB BB BB
3 5 7
1 3 5 7 1
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
channels channels
1–3–5–7 2–4–6–8 1–3–5–7 2–4–6–8
reused
BB BB
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
T w o p o l a r p e r r a c k 2 * (7+1 ) f r e q. R e u s e
Fig. 22. Terminal station layout: extension starting from A) basic layout
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
Fig. 23. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case B) of previous
Fig. 21. on page 69.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
channels
channels 1–2–3–4–5–6–7–8
1–2–3–4
BB
BB
1 3 1 3 5 7
2 4 2 4 6 8
1 3 1 3 5 7
2 4 2 4 6 8
channels channels
1–2–3–4 1–2–3–4 5–6–7–8 5–6–7–8
reused reused
BB BB
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
T w o p o l a r p e r r a c k 2 * (7+1) f r e q. R e u s e
Fig. 23. Terminal station layout: extension starting from B) basic layout
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
Fig. 24. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case C) of previous
Fig. 21. on page 69.
3
1
1 3
2 4
Two polar per rack (3+1) Freq.Reuse Two polar per rack (8+0) Freq.Reuse
BB BB BB
3 5
1
1 3 5 7 7
2 4 6 8
Two polar per rack (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse Two polar per rack 2* (8+0) Freq.Reuse
channels channels
1–3–5–7 1–3–5–7 2–4–6–8 2–4–6–8
reused reused
BB BB
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
Fig. 24. Terminal station layout: extension starting from C) basic layout
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
Fig. 25. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case D) of previous
Fig. 21. on page 69.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
channels
channels
1–2–3–4 1–2–3–4
1–2 1–2
reused
reused
BB
BB
1 3
1
2 2 4
Two polar per rack (3+1) Freq.Reuse Two polar per rack (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse
channels channels
1–2–3–4 1–2–3–4 5–6–7–8 5–6–7–8
reused reused
BB BB
3 5
1 7
2 4 6 8
Fig. 25. Terminal station layout: extension starting from D) basic layout
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
Fig. 26. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case E) of previous
Fig. 21. on page 69.
BB
BB
1 3
1 3
2 4 2 4
Two polar per rack (3+1) Two polar per rack (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse
BB BB BB
3 5 7
1 3 5 7 1
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
channels channels
1–3–5–7 2–4–6–8 1–3–5–7 2–4–6–8
reused reused
BB BB
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
Fig. 26. Terminal station layout: extension starting from E) basic layout
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
Fig. 27. shows an example of 4+0/4+1 EAST/WEST terminal basic configurations.
channels
1–3–5 1–3–5
A) T w o p o la r e a s t–w e s t p e r r a c k
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1 3 5
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
2–4 2–4
2*(4 + 1)
BB 2 4
channels
1–3–5 1–3–5
1–3 1–3
1 3 5 B) T w o p o la r e a s t–w e s t p e r r a c k
reused reused 2*(4 + 1) f r e q. R e u s e
BB
channels
1–2–3 1–2–3
1 2 3 C) T w o p o la r e a s t–w e s t p e r r a c k
1–2 1–2
reused reused 2*(4 + 1) f r e q. R e u s e
BB
channels
1–2–3–4–5 1–2–3–4–5 1 2 3 4 5 D) O n e p o l a r e a s t–w e s t p e r r a c k
2*(4 +1)
BB
ED 03
514
2.5.4 System configuration for network solutions
Besides the radio configurations presented previously, the 9600LSY family supplies an answer to various
transmission problems supplying particular functional solutions.
Space Diversity
All the available configurations in all the frequency bands of 9600LSY family may include the Space
Diversity protection. This feature is obtained adding to the system a second receiver connected,
through a dedicated branching, to the Space diversity second antenna.
This second receiver, exactly equal to the main one, is installed inside the transceiver unit, in the
dedicated area just aside the main one.
The two IF signals (coming from the main and diversity receivers) are sent to the modem, where are
processed by two demodulators and summed by a new designed baseband combiner.
To achieve this function, one plug–in IF module with A/D converters must be added to the modem
unit.
Expansion procedure
9600LSY is a fully expansible radio system. It means that, starting from the minimum 1+1 / 2+0
configuration, it is possible to increase the traffic capacity adding to the station the units necessary
to increase the number of radio channels up to the maximum allowed by the configuration.
ED 03
514
2.5.5 Branching configurations
The branching for N+0 or N+1 configurations is realized in two different ways to be connected to a single
or double polarized antenna (1 or 2 polarizations per rack versions) and can manage up to 8 RF channels.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
In both cases, Tx and Rx filters and channel circulators are accommodated in two horizontal lines
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
respectively at the bottom side and at the upper side of the transceiver subrack.
They are connected to the antenna circulators sited over the top of the rack by means of branching
connections installed along one or both rack side walls.
Depending on the frequency band, the branching is realized utilizing coaxial connection (4 and 5 GHz
bands) or using waveguides (from 6 GHz to 13 GHz).
The branchings connected to the space diversity receiver (this function is foreseen in all the bands and
for all the configurations) follow the technological choice utilized for the main branching.
The utilization of narrow band RF branching filters allows to avoid the use of –3 dB hybrids ( –3dB couplers
previously used for CCDP application) in all the frequency plans and for all the frequency spacings
including 28 MHz.
In all configurations, the connections among transceivers and relevant channel–depending branching
units are realized by vertical parallel coaxial cables without any cross connection.
This realization permits to simplify the installation operations (see Fig. 28. herebelow).
Rx Diversity branching
Rx branching
Coaxial interconnections
Branching H or V Branching V or H
Tx branching
ED 03
514
Branching extension without traffic interruption
More and more often customers require to expand installed systems without causing traffic interruption.
Following this requirement, a particular branching solution has been developed.
Balanced branchings
The so called “balanced branchings” consents to get a constant attenuation of the branching for all the
channels relevant to the same terminal. So, also the system gain is constant whatever channel it is referred
to.
To get this performance the rule that has been followed is to insert the successive transmitters to the first
following the first and , on the contrary, to insert the added receiver before the existing ones.
The next figures give an exemplification of the balanced branching connections in the two cases of one
polarization per rack and two polarization per rack.
ITU–R F. 383 channel plan foresees a frequency distance between the innermost channel of 44.49 MHz.
This narrow distance between channels 8 and 1’ has obliged to insert, inside the branching in transmission
side, a dedicated wide–band filter to avoid local interference between said channels that supplies an
additional filtering to the residual spectrum power generated by the transmitter 8 or 1’ at the frequency
of the receiver 1’ or 8 .
This filter is always installed in the branching, in all configurations (co–polar and alternate polar) and in
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
independent way respect to the channels effectively installed in the link. It means that even if channels
8 and 1’ are not utilized, the branching contains the filter. In such a way, we are free to install successively
the channels 8 and 1’ for expansions of the link, without necessity to add the filter and , at last, without
causing traffic interruption.
ED 03
514
One polarization per rack branching
In Fig. 29. herebelow, the branching version for 8 RF channels arranged in 1 polar per rack configuration
is shown. The picture include the space diversity optional branching.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
MAIN
SP.DIV.
SP.DIV.Rx
MAIN Rx BRANCHING
RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Tx BRANCHING
The first slot on the left of the transceiver subrack is used for the spare transceiver (TR 0).
All the transceivers present in this configuration are connected to the single polarized branching and are
housed utilizing the slots in sequence starting from left side.
Please note the branching positions utilized for transmitter and receiver filters in the balanced branching
solutions.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
Two polarizations per rack branching
In Fig. 30. herebelow, the branching version for 8 RF channels arranged in 2 polar per rack configuration
is shown. The example here reported includes the space diversity option.
MAIN ANTENNA
SP.DIV. Rx
BRANCHING
MAIN Rx
BRANCHING
RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX
0 1 2 3 6 7 8 9
TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX
0 1 2 3 6 7 8 9
Tx BRANCHING
Fig. 30. Branching version for 8 RF channels, arranged in 2 polar per rack configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
In Fig. 31. herebelow, a 3+1 configuration, again with 2 polarization per rack, is reported, in this case
including the space diversity functionality.
Note that the expansion of the system is obtained progressively filling the transceiver subrack (and the
branching, as consequence) adding new units starting from the left and right external sides of the subrack.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Diversity Rx
Branching
Main Rx
branching
Tx branching
Fig. 31. Branching version for 3+1 configuration with Space Diversity, arranged in 2 polar per rack
version
The first slot on the left of the transceiver subrack is reserved to the transceiver utilized for protection
(TR0).
It can work either on H or V polarization, depending on the RF channel utilized .
As a consequence, the branching installed in the left part of the rack can be connected either to the H
antenna polarization or the V one.
Once that the polarization (H or V) of the left side branching has been chosen, all the units that must be
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
connected to this antenna polarization will be installed on the left side and connected to this branching .
The others (connected to V or H polarization) will be installed and connected to the branching located on
the right side.
ED 03
514
2.6 Radio Transmission features
2.6.1 Foreword
The handbook parts that should be read before starting this paragraph are:
2.6.2.1 Introduction
A further improvement of transmission capacity can be obtained by the simultaneous use of the RF
channel for two independent digital transmissions on orthogonal polarization, which is commonly
addressed to as Cross–polarized co–channel frequency reuse technique.
Frequency reuse systems actually result in doubling the spectral efficiency of conventional transmissions.
However this is paid in terms of additional signal distortion, because of inevitable cross–coupling of dual
polarized channels. This is due both to propagation conditions (notably rain and ground reflections) and
imperfections in the antennae and waveguide feeders. The result of reduced cross polarization
discrimination (XPD) is cross polarization interference (XPI) , which sums up with intersymbol
interference generated by channel dispersions and give rise to potentially serious impairments in
detection.
XPI and intersymbol interference can be jointly contrasted by resorting to adaptive processing techniques.
Baseband equalizations together with cross polarization interference canceller (XPIC) allow signal
distortion to be kept within tolerable limits, thus making frequency reuse a viable option.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
2.6.2.2 XPIC Operating principle and receiver architecture
The idea behind the XPIC operation is that of adjusting the amplitude and phase of the received signal
samples of the opposite polarization, so as to provide an estimate of the XPI corrupting the desired co–pol
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
signal. This estimate can then be subtracted from the main signal, producing cross–pol interference
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
cancellation. Taking into account the time–varying nature of the channel, the XPIC operation must be
adaptively adjusted according to a proper rule to track the variation in both co–polar and cross–polar
channels parameters.
To counteract both XPI and multipath fading, the joint use of XPIC and adaptive equalization is advised.
Following this approach, the adopted cross–pol co–frequency receiver structure results in an arrangement
of four adaptive bandspaced transverse filters, as show in Fig. 32.
H pol.
received signal EQUALIZER H data
XPIC
H error signal
V error signal
XPIC
V pol.
received signal EQUALIZER V data
In the same figure the XPIC updating criterion is also addressed. The XPIC tap–weights are adjusted so
as to minimize the correlation between cross–pol received signal and co–pol error signal.
This operation minimizes the correlation between error signal and cross polarization interference.
A fundamental issue in a frequency reuse system design is the receiver recover capability. As a matter
of fact, deep fading occurrences, which can produce a system loss of lock, are usually of short duration,
so that also moderate hysteresis effects on system lock–in can severely increase the total outage time (C/I
typical values 2 – 5 dB).
Therefore, care must be taken in the choice of the receiver synchronization strategies, in order to avoid
any interaction between dual–pol sections of receiver during the recovery process.
The adopted frequency reuse system architecture is sketched in Fig. 33. on page 84.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
H IF
LO DEM
DOWN
H
RX IF +
CONV DATA
XPIC
. synchr.
LO slave
V UP
MOD TX
DATA CONV
DEM
DOWN V
RX IF +
CONV
XPIC DATA
LO
V IF
The only design constraint is that a common RF local oscillator is used for both dual–pol signals, while
two independent decision directed carrier recovery loops are employed for the demodulation from IF to
baseband for each equalizer canceller pair input signals.
This approach preserves the precise phase and frequency relationship between the received signal and
the cross–pol signal used for XPI cancellation.
And this is true even when the carrier associated with the received signal is out of lock. Such coherence
has very important implications because without cancellation, when the terminal is out of lock, XPI
distortion will be so severe that the terminal will not easily regain lock.
Another advantage of such an arrangement is that no constraints are imposed on Tx oscillators. In
addition, a joint recovery process of cross–pol carriers is avoided.
The equalizer/canceller system operation is based on dual–pol received signal samples. Therefore, a
critical point of receiver design is to devise the proper signal sampling strategy. We chose to employ a
separate symbol synchronizer for each cross–pol branch of the receiver. As indicated in Fig. 33. , the
same clock is used to sample the input signal of an equalizer and of the associated XPI canceller. This
makes the XPIC operation independent of the synchronization of dual polarized transmitted data streams.
It is of great importance to observe that the above synchronization strategies result in a complete
independence of operation of the receiver branches on opposite polarization. This allows operation even
when the receiving digital terminal on the opposite polarization is out of service.
The receiver performance can be assessed in term of the XPI rejection capability of the canceller. This
is quantified by the cross–polarization improvement factor (XPIF), which is the difference of the carrier
to XPI ratio (C/XPI’s) corresponding to a predefined error performance in a dual polarized system with and
without XPIC, respectively.
Typical values (optimum phase) for a 128 MLC system is 22 dB.
The XPIC card is a daughter board that has to be inserted in both modem units of the main and reused
channel of each bearer that is reused. This unit is installed in the system only if the reuse of frequency is
implemented. It can be also added to the modem in second step if a expansion of the system utilizing the
reuse of a frequency is required after the first installation.
The unit has a second utilization, again as daughter board, as baseband combiner when the space
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
2.6.2.5 Rack configurations for frequency reuse
Frequency reuse technique allows to double the transmission capacity of each radio channel; a certain
number of channels is then transmitted at the same frequency of the main one on the second antenna
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
polarization.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
We can envisage two main different topologies of reused systems: with one spare channel and with two
spare channels.
Terminals with a single protection channel are installed in only one rack .
The maximum number of channels is 8 and up to 4 different frequencies can be utilized.
Each terminal is identified in the network as a single N.E.. Higher configurations are not allowed.
Fig. 34. hereafter reported shows an example of a reused terminal .
In the example all the channels are reused and the spare channel, transmitted by the first transceiver
installed on the left side of the shelf, is channel 1H. The configuration obviously utilizes double
antenna polarization.
TRU
RRA/MODEM
AND ACCESS
AREA
(BASEBAND
SHELF)
Rx
BRANCHING
CROSS–CORRESPONDENCE
1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1
OF H–V CHANNELS HHHH VVVV
CHANNELS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Tx
BRANCHING
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 34. 7+1 reused terminal with single protection (ch. 1H)
ED 03
514
b) Reused systems with two protection channels
Two protection channels are available when a complete 2x(n+1) system is installed in two racks. In
this case there will be two n+1 systems , one for each rack, using n+1 frequencies. One spare channel
for each rack is present. Maximum number of channels for each polarization is 8 (including the spare
RACK 0 RACK 1
TRU TRU
RRA/MODEM RRA/MODEM
AND ACCESS AND ACCESS
AREA AREA
(BASEBAND (BASEBAND
SHELF) SHELF)
Rx Rx
BRANCHING BRANCHING
CROSS–CORRESPONDENCE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OF H–V CHANNELS VVVVVVVV
HHHHHHHH
CHANNELS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Tx Tx
BRANCHING BRANCHING
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 35. 2 x (7+1) reused terminal with double protection (on ch. 1H and 1V) in 1PPR solution
In the figure, two other slots are available in each rack for future expansion.
The shown terminal layout foresees the “side to side” rack position, but the “back to back” solution
is also possible.
ED 03
514
c) Expansion of a single protection reused system to double protection
Fig. 36. herebelow shows the expansion of a single protection reused terminal to a higher
configuration. Taking into account the limitation concerning the maximum allowed configuration in
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
case of single protection–single rack terminal (7 working channels and 4 different frequencies), the
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
TRU TRU
RRA/MODEM RRA/MODEM
AND ACCESS AND ACCESS
AREA AREA
(BASEBAND (BASEBAND
SHELF) SHELF)
Rx Rx
BRANCHING BRANCHING
CROSS–CORRESPONDENCE
OF H–V CHANNELS 1 3 5 7 7 5 3 1 2 4 6 8 8 6 4 2
HHHH VVVV HHHH VVVV
CHANNELS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Tx Tx
BRANCHING BRANCHING
RACK 0 RACK 1
Fig. 36. Expansion from 7+1 single protection to 2 x (7+1) reused terminal
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
2.6.2.6 Interconnections in reused systems
The specific connections needed for the terminals equipped for the frequency reuse technique are
hereafter described:
The two local oscillators connected to the two RF receivers (main and reused) working on each
reused frequency must be together synchronized. This function is obtained by a phase lock loop
system utilizing a 2 GHz reference signal transferred from the L.O. of the “main” receiver ( master
local oscillator) to the L.O. of the “reused” receiver (slave local oscillator). This connection is
performed by means of a coaxial cable between oscillators and a “Frequency Reuse Kit” (a special
module and associated cabling) inside the Master Oscillator. In case of failure of the main local
oscillator or lack of the synchronization signal due to whatever cause , the slave Rx L.O. of the reused
channel utilizes its own RF signal , obviously unlocked to the main LO, to feed the Rx down converter
and to maintain in service the reused channel.
In case of failure of the master LO, The slave one can assume the master functionality and to be
utilized as source of the reference signal to be used to feed the signal to the frequency multiplier
contained in the main LO and allowing the protection of the master LO .
Fig. 37. herebelow shows how the mutual protection between the two LOs can be obtained.
MASTER LO SLAVE LO
2GHz 2GHz
oscillator oscillator
XN XN
multiplier multiplier
RF OUT RF OUT
If main and reused channels are located in different racks , cable interconnections between the two
racks are needed . The maximum loss acceptable is 10 dB and the cable length is y 7 m .
The XPIC unit, to perform the interference cancellation, must receive the IF signal from both main
and reused receiver. For this reason, in addition to the “standard” cables (used in a non–reused
systems), a IF cable for each XPIC unit must be utilized to connect the main receiver to the
demodulator of the reused system and vice versa.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Two dedicated cable kits, including both the LO and IF connections, are foreseen. They are available
with different cable lengths depending on the connection necessity (inside the same rack or between
the two racks). Only one kit is needed for a couple of reused channels.
ED 03
514
– RF branching interconnection
In case of single polarized rack used in two racks terminal, no branching interconnections are needed
between the racks, each of them being connected directly and independently to one antenna port.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
On the contrary, in case of usage of alternate polarization on both racks, the transceivers utilizing the
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
same antenna polarization must be connected to the same branching. It means that the some
waveguides or cables (depending on the frequency band) will connect the two racks to send to the
two antenna polarization all the H and all the V channels. Following Fig. 38. shows how this is carried
out.
RX BRANCHING RX BRANCHING
TX BRANCHING TX BRANCHING
RACK 0 RACK 1
All the branching configurations do not include passive hybrids. Their utilization has been avoided
thanks to the use of narrow channel filters that allows to transmit channels down to a minimum
distance of 28 MHz on the same branching .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
2.6.3 Transmitted power control: static and ATPC
The product allows two ways to adjust the transmitted power: the first one in a static way, the second one
under automatic control loop (ATPC function).
The capability to adjust transmitted power in a static and fixed way has been introduced for those countries
where, due to internal rules, the ATPC function is not accepted or for those hops in which, due the short
length and interface problems, a fixed reduced transmitted power is preferred.
The range of the possible attenuation depends on the frequency band involved and is detailed in chapter
“Technical Specifications”.
The step for adjustment is 1 dB, with an accuracy of ± 0.5 dB. The setting of the transmitted power can
be performed locally by means of ECT.
The automatic control of the transmitted power (ATPC) function allows to regulate the transmitted power
in order to supply a reduced power in situation of normal propagation and the maximum power in
conditions of fading.
In synchronous radio link systems, the ATPC device is considered a very important function taking into
account the following advantages:
– reduction of the internal interferences of the radio system and with other systems
– reduction of the average consumption of the transmitter considering that the maximum power is
supplied for small percentages of time
– improvement of the averages conditions of the transmitter about the linearity and consequent
reduction of phenomena of background error due to non linear distortion that with ATPC could be
revealed only in conditions of fading
– possibility to increase the System Gain as a consequence to the reduction of the Back–off on the
power transmitted taking into account what above mentioned
As far as concern the values relative to the operating range of the ATPC, refer to chapter “Technical
Specifications”.
The ATPC system is based on a control loop of the power transmitted between a TX transmitter and a RX
receiver connected in a radio link.
With reference to Fig. 39. on page 91, the receiver furnishes through the AGC voltage the information of
the received power to the ATPC controller; it compares the voltage with threshold values (presettable) and
according to the obtained result send through to the ATPC controller on the remote station of the link the
orders of increase/ decrease of transmitted power. These orders are processed and therefore transferred
to the associated transmitter.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
STATION A STATION B
PRX RX
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
IF
document, use and communication of its contents
IF DEM
MOD
VATPC
COMATPC
ATPC AGC
CONTROL
RFCOH RFCOH
EXTRACT INSERT
RX FAILURE PRX ATPC
PRX PTX
DEM IF RX TX IF MOD
N.B. ATPC regulation shown in one direction of transmission only and valid for each channel
The information of control of the transmitted power is exchanged between the two stations of a link utilizing
service channel at 64 Kbit/s inserted in RFCOH bytes (avoiding to touch standard SOH bytes).
In the protected configurations these information are transmitted 1+1 protected.
The information regarding the ATPC functionality can be resumed in the following (for each channel):
– received power (absolute digital value to be transmitted towards the remote station in order to move
the Tx output power).
– Rx failure (for remote Tx inhibition with reused system configuration)
– ID_channel + ID_direction (for identification of ATPC channel in order to avoid problems in case of
crosstalk/interference or in case of 1+0 east–west configuration release 2.0)
These information are organized in registers of SPRI (Serial Peripheral Register Interface) where the PRx
and ID_ch information are transmitted with higher priority than Rx fail.
The information for each channel received in remote station is sent to the relevant transmitter where the
PRx information received is compared to the thresholds set and it is decided to send up or down or hold
commands to the RF transmitter.
The Rx failure received in the Tx remote station is used to switch off the relevant transmitter in case of
frequency reuse or to set the Tx at low Pout in case of standard configuration (no frequency reuse
application).
The service channel above mentioned is a point to point type and in the SDH systems is terminated in each
RRA/Modemodulator.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
Organization of the control system
The ATPC control system is replied for each channel without any centralized function.
The system control is organized in two parts for each channel and for each direction:
The transmitter is able to change the output power in the range MAX TL (max level) and MIN TL (min level).
The transceiver has an its own default value for MAX TL, MIN TL and NOM TL (nominal level).
It is possible to set the following values:
The extreme thresholds MAX TL and MIN TL are reported in the data sheet (see par. 3.3.2)
It means that:
– the ATPC range is not fixed but variable according to the values set for A MAX TL and A MIN TL
– the max ATPC output power can be different from the max output power of the transmitter and the
ATPC functionality can be maintained with reduced range
The receiver has an its own default value (not changeable) for a receive power threshold called EXTRA
POWER threshold depending on the signal (STM1 or STM0) corresponding to guaranteed threshold
10E–6.
On the receiver it is possible to set a received power Low threshold for loop activation within the following
limits:
LOW threshold: in the range from –40 dBm to –EXTRA POWER threshold dBm
When the received signal decreases and overcomes the LOW threshold the transmitter increases the
output power up to the nominal value. Only if the received signal overcomes the EXTRA POWER threshold
the transmitter increases the output power reducing its back–off (if LMA>LN only). The hysteresis for both
thresholds is 3dB.
The PRx value sent to the transmitter is refreshed with 10ms time interval.
In case of loss of Tx_Rx ATPC signal, exchanged between Tx and Rx, the output power is frozen and an
ATPC loop alarm must be activated (no other actions are taken); when the communication is restored the
ATPC loop alarm is disactivated after an hysteresis to be defined.
It is possible to enable or to disable ATPC function: when ATPC is disabled the output power can be driven
normally according to 3.3.2.
Every power change, from manual to automatic and viceversa is performed at the speed of 1dB /10ms.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
To be sure that a decreasing of Rx power of one receiver corresponds to a PTx increasing of the relevant
Tx in remote station an “identifier station code” must be used. The same “identifier station code” should
be set on the two station involved in the ATPC functionality avoiding that in crosstalk/interference or
RFCOH bypass in repeater the Tx in one station can be driven by a not relevant Rx.
ED 03
514
2.6.4 Loopbacks
The loopback function makes fault location and maintenance tests fast and simple.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
RRA MD TRI
RRA MD TRI
MODEM RT
SPI RST RST RPS RFCOH
RSPI
RSPI
RRA MD TRI
All of these are loop and continue loopbacks (the signal is sent back and continues its path).
the residual BER values (RBER) are not guaranteed in Radio Local Loop condition on.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
2.6.4.1 Caution: channel lockout
To make measures on a looped–back channel meaningful, the following sequence must be followed:
Channel lockout on/off and loopback on/off are performed by Craft Terminal (see Operator’s Handbook
for details).
A LHR Network Element can be controlled, besides by the local Craft Terminal (ECT), by a Remote Craft
Terminal (RECT). In certain conditions, that are explained here, loopbacks set–up by RECT are not
recoverable by RECT, therefore their setting–up by RECT must be avoided.
The remote control by RECT is carried out by means of the DCC channel which allows to access the
Equipment Controller from the Remote Craft Terminal, as depicted in Fig. 53. on page 116.
DCC control channel uses two radio channels, in 1+1 protected configuration.
The couple of radio channels (x,y in Fig. 53. on page 116) which carry the protected service channel (as
well as the WST channels, if any) is defined via software. These channels can be chosen among the five
couples defined in Tab. 8. on page 50.
Figure in Fig. 43. on page 95 shows the position of the Equipment Controller EC with respect to the
loopback points A,B,C (these loopbacks are named as indicated in previous Fig. 40. thru’ Fig. 42. ).
Therefore, having defined x&y the couple of radio channels transporting the service channel, the following
rules must be followed for loopback setting–up:
– loopbacks on channels other than x&y:
there are no limitations (as these channels are not used for DCC communication purposes):
loopbacks set–up by the local or remote Craft Terminal can be always removed by the local or remote
Craft Terminal
– loopbacks on channels x&y (used for DCC communication purposes) set–up by the local or remote
Craft Terminal:
• can be always removed by the Local Craft Terminal
• with regard to the remotion possibility by Remote Craft Terminal :
a) if only one DCC channel is available, i.e., when any of CH–x or CH–y is unavailable for
any reason, the loopback cannot be removed by the Remote Craft Terminal, according
to the direction from which the RECT tries (unsuccessfully) to access the controlled NE,
because its EC is not reachable, as depicted in Figures and in Fig. 43. on page 95.
b) if both DCC channels are available, the loopback remotion by RECT is possible; obviously:
• unrecoverable loopbacks must never be set–up on both channels CH–x and CH–y
• no failure on the other channel (not looped–back) CH–x or CH–y should occur in the
meanwhile
otherwise the same unrecoverable condition of previous point a ) will occur.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
BB RT
A B C
1
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
EC
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
BB RT
A B C
RECT
2 EC
BB RT
A B C
RECT
3 EC
Fig. 43. EC position with respect to loopback points and consequent unavailability by RECT (CH–x/y)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
STATION 0 STATION 1 STATION 2 STATION 3
03
BB RT RT BB IBB RT RT BB
A B C C B A A B C C B A
EC EC EC EC
955.203.292 Q
RECT CONTROL
1320CT
or OS
EC EC EC EC
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
Fig. 44. Allowed and not allowed loopbacks by RECT (CH–x/y)
ALLOWED LOOPBACKS
(RECOVERABLE BY RECT) A = RRA (RMD) line loopback (see Fig. 40. on page 93)
B = RRA (RMD) internal loopback (see Fig. 41. on page 93)
NOT ALLOWED LOOPBACKS C = RFCOH (RMD) Internal loopback (see Fig. 42. on page 93)
(NOT RECOVERABLE BY RECT)
96 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
2.7 Signal Transmission
2.7.1 Foreword
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
This paragraph describes in detail the Signal Transmission features of 9600LSY family, and comprehends
the following main paragraphs:
The handbook parts that should be read before starting this paragraph are:
One of the most important peculiarity of the 9600LSY family is to allow the selection of the system capacity
according to the customer needs (and allowing band saving utilizing STM–0 capacity, if it can be useful).
In particular, this feature can be applied to 7, 8 and 13 GHz bands, utilizing well defined channel
arrangements for medium capacity transmission. Please refer to section FREQUENCY PLANS & PART
NUMBERS to analyze the frequency arrangements and the channel steps foreseen for the various
frequencies in case of STM–0.
Of course, the STM–0 transmission is suitable to transport also plesiochronous signals with capacity 21x2
Mbit/s, 1 x 34 Mbit/s or 1 x 45 Mbit/s and the systems have been studied to allow an easy migration from
STM–0 to STM–1 (or vice–versa) when the traffic and the band requirements are going to change.
As far as concerns the Way Side Traffic capacity, it is possible to transmit a single 2 Mbit/s WST stream
for each channel carrying STM–1, whether in case of STM–0 it is not possible to transmit any WST.
It is necessary to underline that no direct interfaces at STM–0 level are foreseen. In case of STM–0, the
interface user side is always at STM–1 level but only the first VC–3 is mapped ; in this way it is possible
to maintain the same electrical or optical interface (part numbers) independently from the signal capacity.
The real transformation between STM–1 interface and STM–0 signal takes place inside the RRA/Modem
unit before modulation (or after demodulation) function.
In case of migration from one capacity to the other, no RRA change is necessary. Only the modem has
to be substituted inside the baseband assembly; simple hardware and software presettings (with a new
software configuration) are sufficient to upgrade the system.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
2.7.3 SDH mapping adopted
ED 03
514
2.7.4 SDH interface usage
The system can provide several kinds of user interfaces that may be synchronous (SDH) or
plesiochronous (PDH) and depend on the type of stations involved (Regenerator or WMSN) and the type
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All the available interfaces are summarized, according to the different possible situations In Tab. 6. on
page 44. Details about electrical characteristic of each interface are reported in chapter “Technical
Characteristics”.
It is important to point out that in case of WMSN station (obtained coupling a 9600LSY Regenerator with
a 1650SMC device) inside the same rack), the interface between 9600LSY Regenerator and 1650SM–C
is electrical and the equipment is represented by two separated N.Es .
Some general information that are valid for each version (line rate, physical interface) of the SDH and PDH
traffic interfaces are herewith outlined:
• SOH/POH bytes management according to the standard TTP or CTP rules (see also NERM)
• Optical interfaces according to the standard G.957 short and long haul (see also NERM)
• POH bytes management according to the standard TTP rules: (see also NERM)
• Structure and /or not–structured PDH signals are transparently transported. The frame
structure information (e.g. : CRC,E,A,S bits) are neither handled nor monitored: bi–directional
passthrough at the PDH/SDH interfaces; furthermore, any potential PDH–AIS condition is
transparently forwarded into the relevant VC.
• Detection of VC signal fail conditions set to all “1” the outgoing PDH stream.
Detection of the incoming PDH–AIS conditions (G.706 standard, detection time = 4 frames) can be
enabled/disabled, without consequent actions at VC layer.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
2.7.5 SOH bytes and service channel access
2.7.5.1 Overview
c) RS–OH bytes, that can be inserted/extracted both in multiplex and in regenerator station,
and
Moreover, radio side, the transmission of 1 Way Side Traffic service stream (only in case of STM–1
transmission) is performed mapping it on the bytes of two columns of the RFCOH. The AUX/EOW bytes
handled by the Regenerator and by the WMSN support two types of applications:
1) Local access as termination: the auxiliary bytes of a trail termination can be bi–directionally
interconnected to the voice/data interfaces of the local service unit embedded in the equipment
itself.
2) Cross–connection: the auxiliary bytes of two different trail terminations can be bi–directionally
interconnected providing an auxiliary channel pass–through between every couple of STM–1
ports or different OH sections; it means each single byte can be configured to be
passed–through from one direction (i.e. line side) to another one (i.e. radio side).
The auxiliary bytes connections are always unprotected and the selection of the bytes and the ports are
performed by CT/OS. The dashed cells in Tab. 9. herebelow show the set of potential OH bytes suitable
to be processed as auxiliary channels at the section or the path terminations, with the associated meaning.
RFCOH is a proprietary function implemented to transmit radio specific information (DSI, ATPC,
MC, WST) and to re–route over radio hop a few RS–OH byte terminated.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0 n n 1 J1
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
B2 B2 B2
ÇÇÇ
K1
ÇÇÇ
f f
ÇÇÇ
K2
ÇÇÇ
f f 5 F2 VC–4/3
ÇÇÇD10
S1
f
f
f
f
ÇÇÇ
D11
f
f
f
f
M1
ÇÇÇ
D12
E2 n
f f
n
8
9
K3
N1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
Tab. 10. OH bytes suitable for handling on RST
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0 n n 1
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
B1 d d E1 d f F1 n n 2
RS–OH
D1 d d D2 d f D3 f f 3
4
5
6
MS–OH PASS THROUGH 7
8
9
Column 1 Column 2
DSI MC
ATPC MC
D1 MC
D2 MC
D3 MC
E1 FAIL serv + K0
F1 d,n,f
d,n,f d,n,f
d,n,f d,n,f
ED 03
514
for MS–OH bytes:
Proprietary channels
ED 03
514
2.7.5.2 Regenerator Case
The following Tab. 12. shows for the Regenerator the possible AUX/EOW user interfaces suitable to
access the terminated channels:
64 Kb/s V11 3
Among them it is possible to choose, by software pre–setting, up to six 64 Kbit/s channels plus one voice
frequency channel (EOW), to be transmitted radio side in 1+1 protected way and to be dropped and
inserted in every radio station.
With reference to Tab. 10. on page 101, the RS–OH bytes terminated line side may be in principle mapped
upon software configuration control in the following interfaces as summarized in the following table:
USER INTERFACES
RFCOH bytes (line side) [1] EOW
V.11 V.24 G.703
(Q 23)
E1 X X X X
F1 X X X
d,f,n [2] X X X
Notes:
[1] For the DCCR (D1–D3) and J0 the interfaces is towards SC
[2] max 14 bytes d,n,f.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
With reference to Tab. 11. on page 101, the RS–OH bytes terminated radio side through the RFCOH
function may be in principle mapped upon software configuration control in the following interfaces as
summarized in the following table:
E1 X X X X
F1 X X X
Note:
[1] For the DCCR (D1–D3) and k0 the interface is towards SC
– E1 always terminated on the EOW two ways (line side and radio side)
– F1 plus max 3 bytes accessible (normally radio side) through the user interfaces 2 x 64 Kb/s, 1 x
V11 and 1 x V24.
– Each interface (with the exception of the voice type ) supports only one direction; the same byte can
be assigned to different direction (for example line side and radio side) using 2 interfaces.
Additionally, the regenerator allows the transmission, radio side, of one 2 Mb/s Way Side Traffic (WST)
that represents a service traffic in addition to the main one.
Both the WST and service channels are transmitted using the radio frame complementary overhead
(RFCOH, an arbitrary and unstandardized extra SDH frame overhead).
The main features of the 2 Mbit/s WST Channels management are the following:
– STM–1 capacity:
One 2 Mbit/s Way Side Traffic can be inserted in each STM–1 channel whatever is the channel
spacing (28, 29, 29,65, 30, 40 MHz) used in the channel plans.
– STM–0 capacity:
No 2 Mbit/s Way Side Traffic can be inserted.
– WST protection:
WST can be transmitted in unprotected way, one for each radio channel, by means of the interfaces
(1.0/2.3 – 75 Ohm coax male connectors) allocated in the access area of the subrack.
The possibility to transmit one 2Mb/s WST stream in protected way (on channels 0 and 1 ) is also
given. In this case the access is located on the front panel of Service unit that hosts the WST switching
functionality.
Automatic switching criteria are : Signal Fail (SF), HBER, LBER and EW.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
2.7.5.3 WMSN Case
and the ones located on the regenerator section no longer are no longer utilized.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
For the description of the available service channels relevant to this unit, please refer to 1650SM–C
Technical Handbook.
For an easy clarification about the service accesses, hereafter the front view of the 1650SM–C view is
reported in Fig. 47. herebelow. The service access ports are located on the SERGI card:
In particular, the SERGI unit supplies the access to the auxiliary channels (A) and to the 2 Mb/s Service
stream (B) . Moreover, the connection for the telephone jack is present (C).
(A)
(B)
(C)
1650SM–C
SERGI
ED 03
514
2.7.5.4 Engineering Order Wire characteristic
The EOW Channel allows the access to the phone services of the system.
It is interfaced with the telephone set with DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) Tones and with association
– between one and more stations called in selective mode (multi selective call).
Numbering System
The compatibility with the actual generation of devices is guaranteed by the type of numbering used, with
the two digits that identify the actual
The above statement, limited the max number of devices linked in 90.
Is important to remember that the numbers available are from 10 to 99.
The omnibus call number is identify in the number 00, as in the actual boards.
The multi–selective call can be utilized connecting in conference mode up to the maximum number of
available telephone numbers (90).
This new release is full compatible with the current systems, except few new features here below
described:
A second voice channel is also available for voice transmission in point to point link between adjacent
regenerator terminals. The interface is present on the connector area of the baseband equipment and
the channel can be addressed on one byte of RFCOH .
In case of WMSN configuration it is possible also to connect by cable the service to 1650SM–C unit to be
inserted in MSOH and to be available in MST sections.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
2.7.5.5 Data Channel Characteristics
a) In case of G.703 64 Kbit/s co–directional interface the timing signals (64 KHz and 8 KHz) are derived
from the data stream.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
b) In case of RS422 A V11/V24 64 Kbit/s contra–directional interface the timing signal (64 KHz and 8
KHz) are directed towards the user. The code is NRZ.
ED 03
514
c) In case of RS232C V24/V28 asynchronous up to 9600 baud no timing signals are required. The signal
is internally over sampled up to 64 KHZ. The code is NRZ.
ED 03
514
2.8 Synchronization
2.8.1 Foreword
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
This paragraph describes in detail the Synchronization features of 9600LSY family, and comprehends the
following main paragraphs:
The handbook parts that should be read before starting this paragraph are:
2.8.2 Introduction
SDH transmission operates on general principles that implies the existence of timing devices that form
part of a synchronizing network.
Different behaviors for synchronization are present depending from the type of station either Regenerator
or WMSN.
In this case each incoming STM1 stream takes the network synchronization that is recovered by the
equipment and forwarded to the radio hop or to the line re–timing the transmitted signal by means of the
recovered clock.
The regenerator does not need any other synchronization circuit.
The synchronization requirements implies that a WMSN equipment must include a synchronization
subsystem for a slave clock which functions are specified in ITU–T Rec. G.783 as the Synchronous
Equipment Timing Source (SETS).
The Alcatel 9600LSY radio families are provided with 1650SM–C ADM unit that supplies such
functionalities.
By selecting the external or internal reference source, the equipment works synchronized to the reference.
The 1650SM–C unit can automatically change the reference involved if the selected one is not correct
or can holdover the ”operation mode” if no input reference is available.
1650SM–C supplies the synchronizing and timing signals to all the equipment units (N.B.) by selecting
the synchronizing signal among the available input references.
To this purpose the unit can:
– select the reference source involved;
– change the reference (or mode) when it losses synchronism;
– lock the Local Oscillator to the reference available;
– work in Hold Over/Free Running LO mode when all references are lost.
N.B. In a radio terminal only the ADM takes directly the synchronism from the internal
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
synchronization path, while units of other subracks take indirectly the synchronism by means
of its own phase locked oscillators (e.g. modemodulators). Finally there are units that do not
need synchronism at all (e.g. units of transceiver).
ED 03
514
The “Compact ADM unit” also provides an output synchronization signal at 2.048 MHz with an interface
according G.703 (T4 signal in G783)
This signal is squelched when the unit is working in Free Running or in Hold Over modes.
A maximum of 6 independent references can be defined by mixing type and PDH/SDH parts (the selection
The automatic selection of one of the possible synchronization sources is performed on the base of quality
(SSM algorithm) or priority criteria:
a) Priority Algorithm
The reference source choice is performed checking the signal quality by detecting for every STM–1
synchronization source:
b) SSM Algorithm
If the Timing Marker procedure is enabled, the CRU checks the S1 Bytes from the synchronous frame
of the selected sources and the preset value of the 2 Mbit/s sources then, by the SSM algorithm,
chooses the better source to be used.
The SSM algorithm is in compliance with ETSI DE/TM 1015–6.
The two Algorithms define synchronization source, by switching the reference.
The switch between the source is hitless.
The switch from one reference to the other one occurs without passing through the Holdover mode.
The reference, sent to the PLL circuits, generates the 622 MHz signal used for internal
synchronization.
• Normal
The PLL output is frequency locked to one of the selected references.
• Holdover
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
In absence of an external reference, the ”clock” stored the frequency difference to the last
reference.
This information is used to fix the oscillator frequency value.
The holdover mode guarantees .37 ppm of frequency drift within the first 24 h
ED 03
514
• Free running
Without any reference and information stored in memory, the VCO oscillates at its natural
frequency.
Frequency variations can be due to temperature variations, components degradation etc.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
The free running stability is ± 4.6 ppm. The following setting can also be managed by Craft
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Terminal:
• Lock out
The command allows to disable/enable a timing input from being considered as possible source
of timing.
• Forced switch
The command allows to force the selection of a timing input.
If the source forced becomes unavailable, the internal oscillator will be selected.
ED 03
514
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
The allowable timing references, pointing by S, must be arranged according to decreasing priority
level (i.e. priority level of timing reference pointing by Sj is y than priority level of Sj+1)
ED 03
514
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
The allowable timing references, pointing by S, must be arranged according to decreasing priority
level (i.e. priority level of timing reference pointing by Sj is >= than priority level of Sj+1).
ED 03
514
2.9 Equipment Control
2.9.1 Foreword
2.9.2 Introduction
9600LSY Digital Radio Relay Systems cannot operate correctly without Control and Management
Functions which are usually partially embedded as Synchronous Equipment Management Function
(SEMF) and Message Communication Function (MCF) in the involved Network elements..
Equipment control may be performed locally through an Equipment Craft Terminal (1320 CT) or remotely
through a Craft Terminal in a remote site.
External control units may be dedicated to a Radio subnetwork or may be the Control Elements of an SDH
Network including Radio Links, Fiber Optic Lines, Synchronous Multiplexers and Cross–Connect
Equipment.
Inside an overall Managed Telecommunication Network, SDH Digital Radio Relay Systems are part of a
Managed Synchronous Network. The 9600LSY DRRS equipment interfaces the TMN according to ETSI
Standard and ITU–T Rec G.784, G.773 and ITU–R Rec 750.
The architecture of the management process, which is intrinsically a distributed process based on
Manager and Agent Functions, may influence in the design, the Equipment Control Architecture and the
identification of the Network Elements to be managed.
To connect SDH Radio Equipment to a TMN System Q–type Interfaces are used, adopting the standard
Infomodel based Q–Type Interfaces Qecc and QB3 for a full integration in a multivendor environment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
2.9.3 The NE architecture
A Digital Radio Relay Link identified as a Radio Switching Section is composed of two Radio Relay
Terminals (RRT). Each physical entity RRT is a SDH NEs and therefore according to ITU–T Rec G.784
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All the SDH NE must be able to terminate the Regenerator Section (RS).
Two types of RRT are available depending on the ability to terminate a Multiplex Section (MS) or a
Regenerator Section (RS) only. This ability is required when the RRT having PDH tributaries (140 Mb/s,
2, 34 or 45 Mb/s) behaves like an SDH Multiplexer (i.e. WMSN station composed at least by two NEs:
1650SMC + LHR). When the RRT has SDH tributaries this ability is not strictly required and therefore the
RRT may be equipped with an RRA (Radio Regenerator Adaptation) Assembly (Regenerator station
equal to the NE LHR/LHRC).
Associated to the RS and the MS there are in the SOH of the SDH frame two Embedded Control Channels
(having as physical interfaces the D1–D3 bytes in the RS–OH and D4–D12 bytes in the MS–OH) carrying
the management information between the ends of the RS and MS respectively. These channels are
terminated in the Message Communication Function (MCF), located in the Equipment Controller of the
NE, which behaves like a Packet Switching Node. The communication interface of these channels on the
physical interfaces D1–D3 and D4–D12 is a 7–layer full OSI protocol stack as defined in ITU–T Rec G.784
named Qecc.
While the inter–site or inter–office communications links between SDH NEs will normally be formed from
the SDH ECCs, within a particular site (intra–site connections) or when the SDH NE is acting as Gateway
Network Element (GNE) towards a Data Communication Network connecting the NE with an Operation
System (OS) a 7–layer full OSI protocol stack named QBX is used. QBX is a Q3 type interface and with
reference to the foreseen protocol suites: QB1 is a Connection oriented over X.25 (CONS1) interface, QB2
is a Connectionless Mode over X.25 (CLNS2) interface and QB3 is a Connectionless Mode over ISO 8802
LAN interface.
The previous Q–type interfaces in their standardized versions implies the use of a Management
Application Software based on an object–oriented Information Model and the use at the 7th layer of the
OSI stack of protocols as CMISE, ROSE and ACSE.
The availability on the NE of all these Q–Type TMN interfaces do not imply the contemporary use of all
of them. Their use and the criteria for selecting them is the TMN network designer responsibility according
to the management traffic load and the network layout. The only limitation imposed by standards is that
in the RRRs (and obviously in the RRTs equipped with RRA) the only RS–OH has to be terminated
whereas the MSOH has to be passed–through.
As far as the QB3 and Qecc interfaces is concerned the following criteria in their use have been adopted.
In the WMSN station equipped with the Mux assembly, on the line side the DCC bytes of the MS–OH and
the RS–OH are transferred to the MCF and then processed by the SEMF or re–routed by the MCF to their
destination. While the DCCM bytes of the MS–OH are reinserted in the SDH frame, the DCCR bytes of
the RS–OH are reinserted in the SDH frame through the RFCOH and MODEM units with 1+1 protection
(Radio Channel 1 and 0). In the Regenerator station, while the DCCR of the RS–OH are processed in the
same way as previously described, the MS–OH remains untouched and is carried transparently.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
STATION A STATION B
SEMF SEMF
F F
MCF MCF
1320CT
QB3 QB3
1320CT 1320CT
QB3 QB3
N.B. The couple of radio channels (x,y in Fig. 53. and Fig. 54. above) which carry the protected
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
service channel (as well as the WST channels, if any) is defined via software. These channels
can be chosen among the five couples defined in Tab. 8. on page 50.
ED 03
514
2.9.4 The F interface
The ”F” interface is the control interface connecting a Craft Terminal to a Equipment Controller.
The F interface is not a standard interface since in TMN there is only the F interface as reference point
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
between WSF (Work Station Function) and OSF (Operation System Function) and the F interface is not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
yet standardized.
An F interface has been standardized for all the ALCATEL equipment and is using the following protocols:
– Physical Layer:
Standard: EIA RS232C/ITU–T V24–V28
Type: Point–to–point, Asynchronous full Duplex
Transmission rate: 38600 bit/s
Connector: 9 pin female Sub D
In 9600LSY terminal regenerator, F interface is located on the front panel of the System Controller unit.
In case of WMSN configuration, F interface available on 1650SM–C unit is the one to be utilized as terminal
interface and represents the unique access to the terminal. In this case, by means of RECT software it
is possible to control, besides all the other terminals, also the functionality of the “regeneration” section
of the WMSN terminal. For this reason, the RECT option has to be always foreseen in case of WMSN
functionality.
In the TMN (Telecommunication Management Network) Architecture, while Qecc is the communication
interface on the DCCs (Data Communication Channel) used as ECCs (Embedded Control Channel) in a
SDH Subnetwork, the QB3 interface is used to interface the SDH Subnetwork to the OSs, usually through
a DCN (Data Communication Network). The Gateway Function performing the protocol conversion (from
Qecc to QB3 and vice versa) is carried out by the GNE (Gateway Network Element) of the subnetwork.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
2.9.6 ECT and RECT
ECT
The Equipment Craft Terminal, connected to the F interface of the Equipment Controller, enable an
operator to perform locally the following Element Management functions:
• Equipment Management
• Transmission Management
• Test management
• External points management
• Alarm (fault) management
• Synchronization management
• Radio Management
• Performance Monitoring Management
• Event log manager
• Overhead Management
• Connection Management
• Software Management
• Communication and Routing Management
• Security Management
• Support Management
RECT
The Remote Equipment Craft Terminal is a feature only present in the Single NE Link architecture
which allows the local operator, using an ECT connected to the F interface of the Equipment
Controller, to zoom and perform a complete set of management operations on all the reachable SDH
NEs in the SDH.
The Remote NE can be physically reached through QB3/Qecc.
The Remote Craft Terminal feature applies in NR5 to both Q3 and QB3* NEs, with the exception of
DXC. The feature is basically the same as for NR3 NEs, with the usual difference related to the
support of TSD–IM interface for the management of Q3 NEs.
Despite the fact that this is supposed to be a NE related feature, it becomes a network feature
considering that the network can be composed of both Q3 and QB3* NEs and that an harmonization
is necessary between the two technologies.
The IM–CT is able to manage both Q3 and QB3* NEs (in the sense that both QB3* and Q3 application
are working simultaneously), but it shall be connected to a Q3 NE. Viceversa Nectas CT will keep
on being able to manage only QB3* NEs, and it shall obviously be connected to a QB3* NE.
It’s worth reminding that R–ECT can be connected to any NE pertaining to the same area of the local
NE and to any NE pertaining to different areas (assuming that the DCN network has been correctly
designed and hence inter–area communication is possible from networking viewpoint).
As far as DXC is concerned, the R–ECT feature is not supported, i.e. a DXC CT can be connected
to only one DXC at a time.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
Of course, due to the limitation of the physical resources in the Equipment Controller of the NE, some
network design constraints must be taken into account as the total number of managed NEs (64),
the number of the QB3 NEs (32), the number of the QB3* NEs (32), the number of associations
permanently open (31) between the CT and the remote NEs.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
1) The RECT function provides a remote login facility similar to those offered by an OS to manage
several configured NEs, included the local one.
2) The contemporaneous presence of the RECT function and an OS is possible. The access
disable flag avoids access conflict between the OS and both RECT and ECT on some
operations as configuration modification and remote control with access filtering.
3) The NE which may be remotely controlled by a RECT must be configured and must be loaded
with the same SW version supporting the RECT function. A NE not supporting RECT function
shall refuse the incoming association issued by a RECT and the ECT displays only local
information.
4) Only three RECTs shall be active at a time over one NE. The coexistence of ECTs and RECTs
in the whole network is guaranteed since the conflict in configuring the QB3 NEs is solved locally
by the NE itself.
5) The operator, through the RECT function, is able to see the alarm synthesis of the whole
network .
6) In a SDH network the maximum number of QB3 NEs equipped with the RECT function are 32
and the maximum number of NEs (QB3* NEs and QB3 NEs) manageable by the RECT function
are 64. These figures identify what it is understood as ”small SDH network” for which the RECT
function may substitute the Element Manager.
N.B. Refer to CT Operator’s Handbooks listed in Tab. 79. on page 468, Tab. 82. on page 470, and
para.18.2.2.2 on page 471 for further information on:
ED 03
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
120 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
3 PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION
3.1 Introduction
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
– the equipment’s items (P/Ns, equipping rules, labels for remote inventory)
– their physical and logical position in the system
– the unit assembly/subassembly and front panel drawings, with the usage description of the access
points (connectors, visual indicators, buttons)
– hardware setting description
– Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves on page 129, including:
• General equipping rules on page 129
• Channel provisioning/expansion guideline on page 131
ED 03
514
3.2 Part list
1AB162710001
CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A 72VDC
001791351
1AB162710002
CIRCUIT BREAKER 2A 72VDC
001791352
1AB162710003
CIRCUIT BREAKER 4A 72VDC
001791353
1AB162710005
[4] CIRCUIT BREAKER 10A 72VDC para.3.4 page 128
001791355
1AB162710006
CIRCUIT BREAKER 15A 72VDC
001791356
1AB162710007
CIRCUIT BREAKER 20A 72VDC
001791357
3DB03114AA––
KIT FUSERBREAKER
299702945
SUBRACKS
3DB02143AA–– (D) in Fig. 55.
[5] SUBRACK 2G LH 1
593230033 page 126
3DB02294AA–– (G) in Fig. 55.
[6] RT SUBRACK 1
593230034 page 126
(E) , (L)
3DB03242AA––
[7] FANS SUBRACK H=50 2 in Fig. 55.
593230036 para. 3.9
page 126
page 169
3DB03238AA–– (A) in Fig. 91.
[8] FANS ASSEMBLED 3
411200559 page 169
ED 03
514
.. continues Tab. 13.
ANV P/N MAX EQUIP.
REF NAME POS
Factory P/N Qty RULES
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
SYSTEM WIRING
3DB02842AA––
[9] CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS 1
299702891
CABLE KIT 1 CHANNEL NO 3DB02843AA––
[10] 8
SPACE DIV. 299702892
CABLE KIT 1 CHANNEL WITH 3DB02844AA––
[11] 8
SPACE DIV 299702893
CABLE KIT FOR REUSE 3DB02845AA––
[12] 4
(1 RACK) 299702894
ED 03
514
.. continues Tab. 13.
ANV P/N MAX EQUIP.
REF NAME POS
Factory P/N Qty RULES
OPTICAL MODULES
3AL78815AA––
[31] S–1.1 OPTIC.INTERF. FC/PC 8 (C) , (G)
474166420 Tab. 19.
in Fig. 64.
3AL78815AB–– pg 137
[32] S–1.1 OPTIC. INTERF. SC/PC 8 page 135
474166424
ED 03
514
.. continues Tab. 13.
ANV P/N MAX EQUIP.
REF NAME POS
Factory P/N Qty RULES
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES
BRANCHING FRONT PLATE 3DB03382AA–– (F) in Fig. 55. Tab. 28.
[33] 1
KIT 299702965 page 126 pg 168
(C) + (D)
3AN49589AA––
[34] DUMMY PLATE W40 (RRA) 8 in Fig. 64.
299701212 Tab. 22.
page 135
pg 139
DUMMY PLATE L40 (DC/DC 3DB03010AA–– (E) inFig. 64.
[35] 8
CONV.) 299702912 page 135
3DB03190AA–– (A) in Fig. 79. Tab. 27.
[36] RT FRONT PLATE KIT 8
299702947 page 156 pg 156
ED 03
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
C
J
955.203.292 Q
REGENERATOR
3.3 Rack and shelves summary
F
E
H
D
G
A
B
J
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
I
126 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
Tab. 14. Rack and shelves
NAME
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
ADDITIONAL
(C) [28] para.3.6.8 on page 154
HOUSEKEEPING
(E)
FANS SUBRACK H=50 [7] para.3.9 on page 169
(L)
ED 03
514
3.4 Top Rack Unit (TRU)
The T.R.U. subrack is located at the rack top area of the OPTINEX rack and appears as follows:
1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B
BREAKERS BREAKERS
BATTERY “A” BATTERY “B”
Fig. 56. Top Rack Unit front view
The main functions are:
a) Power supply distribution to all the functional blocks present in the rack.
It is possible to distribute the two battery voltages up to 6 functional blocks installed into the rack.
All the output voltages are protected by automatic circuit breakers (up to 12).
In general, the choice of the breakers, existing also for lower current ranges, has to be chosen
following the effective current consumption needed by the subracks.
Maximum current supplied by each battery shall not exceed 60 A.
Circuit Breaker (A) = [ (Max Absorbed Power (W)) / (Nominal Battery Voltage (48V)) * 1.5 * 1.2]
For circuit breaker and Fuserbreaker P/Ns see REF.NO TAG in Tab. 13. on page 122
c) Extension Q2 bus unit or rack alarm distribution unit (optional units, in alternative).
Please refer to OPTINEX rack specific documentation (see para.18.2.2.1 on page 471).
ED 03
514
3.5 Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves
a) in Base Band shelf, units SYSCO, SERV, PSF–1 and PSF–2 are always equipped
b) the number associated to RRA, MD and PSU groups is related to physical (but not necessarily also
logical) channel (0 – 9). The same number identifies the associated TRI
c) only 8 RRA, MD and PSU groups and the associated TRI can be equipped at most. The slot positions
that must be used depend on the system configuration; in particular:
1) with single polarization configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups must be equipped in
the logical number sequence 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 (see Fig. 59. on page 131).
Thus, in these configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups 8 and 9 are never equipped, as
ÉÉÉÉ
depicted in Fig. 57. herebelow;
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
S
S R R R R R R M R M R M R M R M
M
ÉÉÉÉ
Y M M M M
E R R R R R R D R D R D R D R D
S R D D D D D
ÉÉÉÉ
A A A A A A 5 A 6 A 7 A 8 A 9
C V 0 1 2 3 4
ÉÉÉÉ
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
O
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
P P P P P P P P P P P P
S S S S S S S S S S S S
F
1
U
0
U
1
U
2
U
3
U
4
U
5
U
6
U
7 ÉÉÉÉ
U
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
8
U
9
F
2
UNITS
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ NEVER
EQUIPPED
T T T T
R
T T T T
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
T T
ÉÉÉÉÉ
R R R R R R R R R
I I I I I I I I I I
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
8 9
ÉÉÉÉÉ
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
2) with double polarization configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups must be equipped in
the sequence 0, 8, .... (see Fig. 60. on page 132, Fig. 61. on page 133 and Fig. 62. on page
133).
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
S
Y
E R
S R
R R R
M
R
M
R
M
R
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
M
R
R
R M R M
M
R D R D
R M
R D
R M R M
R D R D
ÉÉÉÉ
S R D D D D D
A A A A A A 5 A 6 A 7 A 8 A 9
ÉÉÉÉ
C V 0 1 2 3 4
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
O
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
P P P P P P P P P P P P
ÉÉÉÉ
S S S S S S S S S S S S
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
F U U U U U U U U U U F
1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
UNITS
NEVER
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
EQUIPPED
ÉÉÉÉ
T T T T T T T T T T
ÉÉÉÉ
R R R R R R R R R R
ÉÉÉÉ
I I I I I I I I I I
3
ÉÉÉÉ
0 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9
ÉÉÉÉ
Fig. 58. Layout of max 8 channels in double polarization configurations
d) in the unused slots, dummy plates mus be equipped to ensure EMC performance as well as
equipment correct ventilation;
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
3.5.2 Channel provisioning/expansion guideline
9600 LSY is a fully expansible radio system. It means that, starting from the minimum 1+1 / 2+0
configuration, it is possible to increase the traffic capacity adding to the station the units necessary to
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
increase the number of radio channels up to the maximum allowed by the configuration.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Hereafter the expansion procedure is reported with the help of some figures illustrating the slots to be used
to house the added transceivers inside the mechanical assembly. Please, keep in mind that for the
RRA/modem units the same procedure is still valid; it means that the Base Band shelf’s slots
corresponding to those utilized for the transceiver will host the associated RRA/modem units. In this way
the connections between transceivers and relevant modem units is realized by vertical parallel coaxial
cables, without cable cross–connections.
a) If the branching unit utilizes a single polarization, the transceivers and the branching unit will be
added using the slots starting from left and going toward the right side of the subrack, as shown in
the next Fig. 59.
The maximum channel number depends on the channel plan. In every case the maximum number
of transceiver that can be housed in the subrack is 8.
The slot used for the protection transceiver (slot 1) is fixed and it is the first on the left of the subrack.
H (V)
Fig. 59. Single polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
b) If the branching unit utilizes two antenna polarizations , the transceivers and the branching unit
will be added installing them stating from the side walls and filling the subrack going toward the
subrack centre, in position left or right depending on the polarization of each transceiver, as shown
in the next figure.
So, the antenna polarization of the radio channel used for protection (H or V) defines which branching
(H or V) will be installed at the left side of the rack. For the above reason, it is important to keep
in mind that H or V positions are not strictly associated to the left or right side of the subrack.
The example reported in Fig. 60. is limited to 4 channels. It refers to a system with spare channel on
H antenna polarization and, consequently, with transceivers and branching connected to H
polarization on the left side of the subrack.
1 2 1 4 2 1 5 2 4
H V H V V H H V V
2 2 4 2 4
1 1 1 5
V
Fig. 60. Two polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack with the H channels
on the left side
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
c) The next Fig. 61. shows the other possibility, in which the spare channel (2) utilizes the V polarization
and, consequently, the transceivers and branching are connected to V polarization and are
installed on the left side of the subrack.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
2 3 2 4 3 2 4 6 3
V H V V H V V V H
H 2 2 4 2 4 6
V 3 3 3
Fig. 61. 2 polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack with V channel on the
left side
The above figure shows only two of the possible expansions that depend on the mixing of (H) and
(V) transceivers that must be utilized.
d) The next Fig. 62. gives an example of the installation of the units in case of frequency reuse
technique utilization in a 7+1 protected terminal. At first, the terminal utilizes the first 4 channels (with
channel 4 V as spare channel). The successive expansion of the system is performed adding the
channels working on the same frequencies but transmitted on the opposite antenna polarization.
4 2 3 1 4 2 1 3 4 2 3 1
V V H H V V V V H H H H
1 2 3 4
H 2 4
V 1 3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
3.6 Base Band shelf
BOARD
EQUIPMENT
AREA
ED 03
514
3.6.1 Base Band shelf unit layout and equipping rules
Please refer to para.3.5 on page 129, for Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
S S R R R R R R M R M R M R M R M
M M M M M
Y E R R R R R R D R D R D R D R D
D D D D D
S R A A A A A A 5 A 6 A 7 A 8 A 9
0 1 2 3 4
C V 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
O
C
A G C C C C C C C C C
B D D D D D D D D D D
P P P P P P P P P P P P
S S S S S S S S S S S S
F U U U U U U U U U U F
1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2
E E E E E E E E E E
F F
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Fig. 64. Base Band shelf board equipment (slot numbering and board type and numbering)
For:
– slots (C) + (G) + (D) + (E) equipment, refer to para.3.6.1.4 on page 136
ED 03
514
3.6.1.1 System Controller card
N.B. Refer to para.3.6.2 on page 140 for the unit physical views and operative information.
N.B. Refer to para.3.6.8 on page 154 for the unit physical views and operative information.
N.B. Refer to para.3.6.3 on page 144 for the unit physical views and operative information.
ED 03
514
3.6.1.4 RRA, MD and PSU card groups and dummy plates
a) RRA
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
RRA – CHANNEL
[17] RRA
all slots (C)
RRA – STAND–BY
[18] RRAS
slot (G) only
S–1.1 OPTIC.
[31] IS–1.1
INTER.FC/PC
S–1.1 OPTIC.
[32] IS–1.1
INTER.SC/PC
N.B. For the unit physical views and operative information, refer to para.3.6.4 on page 147 for the
RRA–CHANNEL, and to para.3.6.5 on page 149 for the RRA–STAND–BY.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
b) MD
N.B. Refer to para.3.6.6 on page 150 for the unit physical views and operative information.
c) PSU
Label for
P/N
UNIT Remote
(REF in Tab. 13. on page 122)
Inventory
DC/DC CONVERTER
[29] PSL–4860
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
BB 2G LH
N.B. Refer to para.3.6.7 on page 153 for the unit physical views and operative information.
ED 03
514
d) Dummy plates
Tab. 22. Dummy plates for RRA–Modem and PSU equipping rules
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
When a group of RRA, MD and PSU is not equipped, the corresponding slots must be
closed by dummy plates, to ensure EMC performance as well as equipment correct
ventilation.
Label for
P/N
UNIT Remote
(REF in Tab. 13. on page 122)
Inventory
(C)
DUMMY PLATE W40
+ (RRA + MD)
[34] ––
(D)
DUMMY PLATE L40
(E) (DC/DC CONV.)
[35] ––
N.B. Refer to para.3.6.7 on page 153 for the unit physical views and operative information.
N.B. Refer to para.3.6.9 on page 155 for the unit physical views and operative information.
ED 03
514
3.6.2 SYSTEM CONTROLLER and FLASH CARD unit operative information
Refer to:
– para.2.4.4.7 on page 57 for a brief functional description of the unit
– Fig. 66. herebelow shows the FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction
• for the front connectors usage, please refer to para.4.7.6 on page 207.
• the usage of the pushbuttons Lamp Test (7) and Reset (9), is explained in para.4.7.6 on page
207, and in chapter 7 on page 355.
• the usage of the other pushbuttons and leds is explained in chapter 7 on page 355.
– para.3.6.2.2 on page 142 describes the hardware setting options dependent on SWP and system
configuration.
Subunit
ESCON
J1
J2
J3
M1
Flash Card
M2
System Controller
M3
main board (ESC)
Fig. 65. System Controller assembly, front connector numbering and and internal view
TOP SIDE
INSERTION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
J1
I/O for
QB3 10 BASE 2
J2 J3 (2 BNCs in parallel)
F interface
M3
for ECT
ED 03
514
3.6.2.1 Lamp Test & Reset buttons
With reference to Fig. 67. on page 141, the pushbuttons Lamp Test (7) and Reset (9) allow the following
operations:
System lamp test of all the leds in all units of Baseband shelf
X
(Transceivers not affected)
For the meaning of EC and RC, make reference to para.5.2.2.1.2 on page 237.
Refer to MSZZQ documents relative to the System Controller unit for the TC and Dip–Switch physical
position on the board (see Tab. 89. on page 510).
In the following, only the Dip–Switch banks associated to software configurations are taken into
consideration (for other Dip–Switch banks and TC meaning, please refer to the above cited documents).
1) Equipment Type:
EQTYPE field is fixed to 0110 (Dec. 6) to indicate Long Haul system (there are no Dip–switch
banks to set).
continues..
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
N.B. Before using Tab. 25. or Tab. 26. for configuration setting/change purposes, verify that
the values correspond to those stated in the CT Operator’s Handbook associated to the
Software Package (SWP) running on your system. In the case of conflict between the
values stated in this manual and those indicated in CT Operator’s Handbook, these latter
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
will prevail.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
SLOT–ID
I1 switches Equip. Subrack STM0/ Space
Dec Subrack TRI
Type BB STM1 Diversity
6 5 4 3 2 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 STM–0
SRTRI–1HET
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 STM–1
1+1
SRBB–11
0 0 0 0 1 0 2 HET STM–0 SD
SRTRISD–1HET
0 0 0 0 1 1 3 STM–1 SD
0 0 0 1 0 0 4 STM–0
SRTRI–N
0 0 0 1 0 1 5 STM–1
N+1 SRBB–N1
0 0 0 1 1 0 6 STM–0 SD
SRTRISD–N
0 0 0 1 1 1 7 STM–1 SD
0 0 1 0 0 0 8 STM–0
SRTRI–N
0 0 1 0 0 1 9 STM–1
N+0 SRBB–N0
0 0 1 0 1 0 10 STM–0 SD
SRTRISD–N
0 0 1 0 1 1 11 STM–1 SD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
3.6.3 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit operative information
Refer to:
– para.2.4.4.6 on page 57 for a brief functional description of the unit
• for the front connectors (J1) (J2) usage, please refer to para.4.7.4 on page 202.
• the usage of the front connector (J5) and leds in LINE O.W. area is explained in para.3.6.3.1
on page 146.
• the usage of leds in LINE TPH area is explained in para.3.6.3.2 on page 146.
Optional subunit
ADDITIONAL VOICE
(TPH–DEV)
J1
J2
J3
J4 SMA
J5
Fig. 68. Service unit assembly, front connector numbering and and internal view
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
J1
PROTECTED
WST 2 Mbit/s
J2
J3
NOT OPERATIVE IN
CURRENT RELEASE
J4
operative only
(3) Loudspeaker (*) with TPH–DEV
activated (green) equipped
ED 03
514
3.6.3.1 EOW Channel use
After having connected the DTMF Telephone Kit (Ref.[39] in Tab. 13. on page 122) to the telephone
jack (connector (J5) in Fig. 69. on page 145), the User can implement two call modes:
Front LED indications (LINE O.W. area in Fig. 69. on page 145):
Three Party–Line (VF TX/RX A,B and C) paths are available on BB shelf’s connector M190 (see
Tab. 43. on page 205).
Two Party–Line (VF TX/RX A and B TPH) paths are available on BB shelf’s connector M190 (see
Tab. 43. on page 205).
Refer to MSZZQ documents relative to the Service unit for the TC and Dip–Switch physical position
on the board and their meaning (see Tab. 89. on page 510).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
3.6.4 RRA–CHANNEL unit operative information
Refer to:
– para.2.4.4.3 on page 56 for a brief functional description of the unit
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
– the protection cap (fixed by a screw) that must be removed to access the unit front panel, and must
be repositioned after having connected the cables
– the drawer (fixed by two screws) that must be removed only in case an optional a STM–1 optical
module has to be equipped.
J1
J2
Protection cap
None
ED 03
514
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
STM–1 J1
ELECTR.
INTRF. yellow marker
INPUT
OUTPUT
green marker J2
INPUT
OUTPUT
FC/PC
(1) Card failure alarm (red)
ED 03
514
3.6.5 RRA–STANDBY unit operative information
Refer to:
– para.2.4.4.4 on page 56 for a brief functional description of the unit
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
– chapter 5, and in particular para.5.4.3 on page 289, for the detailed functional description of the unit
As far as the protection cap and extractable drawer are concerned, the assembly view is as in Fig. 70. on
page 147.
The front view is as in Fig. 71. on page 148, with a difference in the lower part, where there is the display
shown in Fig. 72. herebelow:
Indication of the No Tx
of the Tx protected channel
(1 digit display)
None
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
3.6.6 MODEM unit operative information
Refer to:
– para.2.4.4.5 on page 57 for a brief functional description of the unit
The following Fig. 73. shows the protection cap (fixed by a screw) that must be removed to access the unit
front panel, and must be repositioned after having connected the cables:
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5 MODEM
mother
board
Protection cap
Fig. 73. Modem unit assembly view and front connector numbering
They are on the mother board. Refer to MSZZQ documents relative to the Modem unit for the
TC and Dip–Switch physical position on the board and their meaning (choosing the unit type
according to the P/N in Tab. 89. on page 510. WARNING: there are different Modem units).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
The following Fig. 74. :
– depicts the internal connections between IF2 and IF3 inputs and the corresponding CANC–COMB
submodules
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
POS.A
IF INPUT MAIN
IF3 INPUT
STM–0 CASE
CONFIGURATION POS.A POS.B
NO SPACE DIVERSITY UNEQUIPPED UNEQUIPPED
SPACE DIVERSITY CANC–COMB STM–0 UNEQUIPPED
N.B. : XPIC not envisaged with STM–0
STM–1 CASE
CONFIGURATION POS.A POS.B
NO SPACE DIVERSITY AND NO XPIC UNEQUIPPED UNEQUIPPED
SPACE DIVERSITY OR XPIC CANC–COMB STM–1 UNEQUIPPED
SPACE DIVERSITY AND XPIC CANC–COMB STM–1 CANC–COMB STM–1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 74. Modem unit assembly internal view and CANC–COMB equipping rules
ED 03
514
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Modulator output J1
blue marker
IF2 input J4
IF3 input J5
ED 03
514
3.6.7 PSU and PSF units operative information
Refer to:
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
– point c ) on page 138 for physical composition and P/Ns of the PSU unit
– chapter 5, and in particular para.5.3 on page 282, for the detailed functional description of the units
A3
I (1) ON/OFF
O (3) Input
switch
Power
Supply
A1
(2) PSU switched
on
(green)
(4) PSF powered
on
(green)
PSU PSF
Pins Meaning
A1 +BATT +BATTERY
A2 GND Ground
A3 –BATT –Battery
None
ED 03
514
3.6.8 Additional Housekeeping unit operative information
Refer to:
– para.2.4.4.8 on page 57 for a brief functional description of the unit
M1
M2
(1) LED
a) (M1) SUB–D25 pins female connector pinout: see Tab. 52. on page 213.
b) (M2) SUB–D9 pins male connector: see Tab. 40. on page 192.
c) LED (red): indicates the failure of Additional Housekeeping unit
3.6.8.2 Hardware settings
None
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
3.6.9 Kit Loudspeaker operative information
3.6.9.1 Installation
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
The Kit Loudspeaker is an optional unit to be inserted inside TRU and connected to the system as depicted
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
To be connected to
BB connector M190
(see Fig. 95. on page 178)
3.6.9.3 Usage
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
With reference to Fig. 69. on page 145 (Service unit front view):
– Pushbutton (4) activates/deactivates the loudspeaker
– Green led (3) on indicates the loudspeaker activation.
ED 03
514
3.7 Transceiver shelf
A A A A A A A A A A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Fig. 79. Transceiver shelf equipment (slot numbering and board types and numbering)
Please refer to para.3.5 on page 129, for Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves.
Tab. 27. Transceiver units and substitutive dummy plates equipping rules
SLOT IN TRANSCEIVER SHELF (see Fig. 79. on page 156)
TRANSCEIVER
Read carefully General equipping rules on page 129.
Each Transceiver is an assembly made up by components that, from item provisioning and
maintenance points of view, are independent items that are equipped, for types and
number, according to the system configuration, as shown herebelow:
FREQUENCY COMPONENTS TYPES AND NUMBER
DIVERSITY
REUSE TRI LO R FR KIT
N N 1 2 1 0
N Y 1 2 1 1 or 0
Y N 1 2 2 0
(A) Y Y 1 2 2 1 or 0
Refer to para.3.7.3 on page 157 for details.
N.B. For the P/Ns and Remote Inventory Labels of TRI units and modules, please
refer to the specific chapter between those listed in Tab. 67. on page 414.
DUMMY PLATE
When a transceiver is not equipped, the corresponding slot is closed by a dummy plate.
Label for
P/N
UNIT Remote
(REF in Tab. 13. on page 122)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Inventory
RT FRONT PLATE KIT [36] ––
ED 03
514
3.7.3 Composition of transceiver units
a) TRI (Tranceiver)
The transceiver units have different P/Ns for the following characteristics (N.B.):
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
•
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
frequency range
document, use and communication of its contents
to the specific chapter between those listed in Tab. 67. on page 414.
ED 03
514
3.7.4 TRANSCEIVER unit operative information
Refer to:
– para.2.4.3.2 on page 53 for a brief functional description of the unit
ED 03
514
3.7.4.2 Internal composition
FREQUENCY REUSE
DIVERSITY INTERNAL COMPONENTS
USAGE TR HOUSING
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
MAIN RECEIVER
UP CONVERTER AMPLIFIER
Fig. 81. Transceiver internal view: standard components and Main Receiver
ED 03
514
TR.FREQUENCY REUSE KIT
DIVERSITY RECEIVER
MAIN RECEIVER
(inside)
N.B. The Diversity Receiver is mounted on the “PLATE COVERING MAIN RECEIVER” (see
Fig. 81. page 159)
Fig. 83. Transceiver internal view: with “Diversity Receiver” and without “TR.Frequency Reuse Kit”
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
TR.FREQUENCY REUSE KIT
DIVERSITY RECEIVER
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
MAIN RECEIVER
(inside)
N.B. The Diversity Receiver is mounted on the “PLATE COVERING MAIN RECEIVER” (see
Fig. 81. page 159)
Fig. 84. Transceiver internal view: with “Diversity Receiver” and with “TR.Frequency Reuse Kit”
ED 03
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
N.B.
A
I
03
C
955.203.292 Q
B B
3.7.4.4 Internal interconnection diagram
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
H
D F
G
162 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
A
E
D
C
03
continues ..
955.203.292 Q
Enlarged particulars of Fig. 86. page 162
B
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
163 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
.. continues
I
F
H
G
955.203.292 Q
Enlarged particulars of Fig. 86. page 162
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
164 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
3.7.4.5 Front connectors usage
DIVERSITY DESCRIPTION
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
N.B. For connection with Modem and Branching, refer to para.4.6 on page 193.
J9
J10
J11
J12
M2
J5
I1
J6
J7
J8
J13
J14
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
J1
J2
J3
J6
J4
J7
J5
955.203.292 Q
M1
J8
J13
J14
J9
J10
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
J11
J12
M2
I1
166 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
Rx diversity Rx main
section N.B.1 section
red marker
J2
Output 1 IF Rx divers. Output 1 IF Rx main J10
blue marker
ON/OFF switch I1
J5 Input IF Tx
(1) Unit switched on
J6 LO Rx Remote (green)
(Input or Output)
J7 LO Rx monitoring
(2) OR of internal alarms
J8 LO Tx monitoring (red)
RF Tx output J14
ED 03
514
3.8 Branching
These drawings indicate also the connections among the branching and the Transceivers.
As far as the number of channels are concerned, such drawings show only some of the possible
configurations.
ED 03
514
3.9 FANS shelf and FANS assembled units
Presently, there can be either one or two FAN shelves, see pos. (E) and (L) in Fig. 55. on page 126:
– FAN shelf pos. (L) is mandatory whenever the 1650SMC shelf is equipped.
The FANS SHELF contains one or two independent FANS ASSEMBLED units, as depicted in following
ÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Fig. 91. :
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
FANSL
A
FANSL
B
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
1 2 ÉÉÉ
Fig. 91. Fan shelf (slot numbering and board types)
N.B. Refer to para.3.9.3 on page 171 for the unit physical views and operative information.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
3.9.2.1 Equipping rules for FANS assembled unit in Baseband–shelf
up to
E NE
single polarization 2+1 / 3+0
(see Fig. 59. on page 131)
3+1 / 4+0 E E
As far as the ADM–shelf’s FANS–shelf is concerned, only one FAN ASSEMBLED unit is envisaged
(FANSL B, on the rack right side).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
3.9.3 FANS assembled unit operative information
Fig. 92. herebelow and Fig. 93. on page 172 show the physical views of the FANS shelf and FANSL unit
and substitutive COVER assemblies.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
FANS SHELF
FRONT PLATE
COVER
(must be equipped in not used
FANS ASSEMBLED slots to
guarantee correct ventilation)
FANS ASSEMBLED
Fig. 92. FANS SHELF, FANS ASSEMBLED and substitutive COVER assembly views
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
Hole for unit extraction
M1 M3 Can Bus
Power supply input Connector
DIP–SWITCH I
O
O
M2 Can Bus I1 I2 M4
Power supply input
Connector
Fig. 93. Front view of FANS SHELF equipped with both FANS ASSEMBLED units
Hardware settings
ED 03
514
Legend for Fig. 93. :
• Pinout:
Pins Meaning
A1 +BATT +BATTERY
A2 GND Ground
A3 –BATT –Battery
I1 I2 Subrack No Usage
I I 0 Baseband shelf
I O 1 future use
O I 2 ADM shelf
O O 3 future use
ED 03
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
174 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
4 SYSTEM CABLING
4.1 Introduction
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
This chapter describes the 9600LSY system cabling with the following information:
– location of access points for cabling, with the exception of those present on the units’ front plates,
that are described in the paragraphs of previous chapter.
For this information, please refer to the Installation Handbook (REF.[E] on page 469).
ED 03
514
4.2 Shelves’ connectors
Front view
2A 4A 6A 2B 4B 6B
Box TRU
1A 3A 5A 1B 3B 5B
T.R.U.
Front view
M9
T.R.U.
Rear view
M10
b– b’– a’– a–
ED 03
514
Legend for Fig. 94. :
b) (M7) :
for usage see Tab. 37. on page 191; pins connected in parallel to connector (M8)
c) (M6) :
for usage see Tab. 39. on page 192; pins connected in parallel to connector (M8)
e) (M9) :
Power Supply, alarm and service connections (N.B.)
f) (1A) to (6B) :
Output Power Supply connectors/breakers toward the user shelves indicated in Tab. 15. on page
128.
For the physical connection from connector/breakers to the user shelves, make reference to para.4.4
on page 190.
N.B. For further information on TRU unit (in particular for hardware presettings), please refer to
OPTINEX rack specific documentation (see para.18.2.2.1 on page 471).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
4.2.2 Base Band shelf access panel: SUB–D connectors layout
Fig. 95. Base Band shelf access panel: SUB–D connectors layout
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
Tab. 31. Base Band shelf access panel: SUB–D connectors usage
M180 SUB–D25 pins female Can Bus RT see Tab. 37. on page 191
M184 SUB–D9 pins male Rack lamps see Tab. 37. on page 191
M185 SUB–D25 pins female Input Housekeeping see Tab. 51. on page 212
M186 SUB–D25 pins female RT missing connections see Tab. 37. on page 191
M188 SUB–D9 pins female CAN 1 (Download) Terminator see Fig. 104. on page 189
M189 SUB–D9 pins female CAN 1 (Download) Terminator see Fig. 104. on page 189
Out party line OW,TPH and see Tab. 41. on page 203 and
M190 SUB–D25 pins female
loudspeaker Tab. 43. on page 205
M194 SUB–D25 pins female Relè command HST for future use
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
4.2.3 Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST connector layout
OUT J1
1
IN J2
OUT J3
2
IN J4
CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9
yellow markers
In current release only connectors (J1) and (J2) are used for the connection of the 2Mbit/s WST
of the corresponding channel. Connectors (J3) and (J4) are not used.
Fig. 96. Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST front connector layout and numbering
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
4.2.4 Transceiver shelf connectors
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
M1
M2
BATT.A
M4 M3
M5
BATT.B
M7 BATT.A
M6
FOR TRANCEIVERS
BATT.B 0–4
FOR TRANCEIVERS
5–9
ED 03
514
Legend for Fig. 97. :
Pins Meaning
A1 +BATT +BATTERY
A3
A
A2 GND Ground
A1
A3 –BATT –Battery
b) (M1) (M4) connectors: for usage see Tab. 37. on page 191.
c) (M7) connector: CAN RT bus terminated by a CAN bus terminator (see Fig. 104. on page 189).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
4.3 Cable kits and cable types
The following Tab. 32. lists the cable kits envisaged for 9600LSY system and indicates the cable types
used in such kits, the drawing of which are given in the associated figures.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
a) the writings on cable connectors (like (A1) , (A2) , etc.) are used as ’CABLE SIDE information’ in the
following paragraphs, to point out the correct cable connections;
b) some labels are colored. In conjunction with the colored markers present on some units, this
facilitates cabling, matching the colour on cable label with that of colored marker on the unit front
plate;
c) in the Cannon–Cannon cables the pin connection is 1:1 (i.e. pin 1 left connected to pin 1 right, pin
2 left connected to pin 2 right, etc.).
N.B. 1 the use of this kit is not specified in current edition of this handbook.
2 Each Can bus line must be terminated by a plug with two load resistors (120 ohm resistors
mounted on SUB–D9 pins male connectors inserted on female connectors).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
A: 3–pins female for power supply
N.B. A2
B1
B2
N.B.
N.B.
C1
D1
N.B.
N.B.
ED 03
514
F: Siem.M. 1.0–2.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.0–2.3 900
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
ED 03
514
K: Siem.M. 1.0–2.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.0–2.3 900
RT n signal flow RT n
J6 H (V) J6 V (H)
N1 N2
white label white label
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
KK: Siem.M. 1.0–2.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.0–2.3 900
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
RT n MODEM n
signal flow
J11 V (H) J4 H (V)
KK1 KK2
(RACK1) (RACK2)
white label white label
RT n MODEM n
signal flow
J11 H (V) J4 V (H)
(RACK1) (RACK2)
white label white label
RT n MODEM n
signal flow J5 H (V)
J11 V (H)
PP1 (RACK2) PP2
(RACK1)
white label white label
RT n MODEM n
signal flow J5 V (H)
J11 H (V)
(RACK1) (RACK2)
white label white label
NN: SMA.M. 900 / SMA.M. 900
RT n RT n
J6 H (V) signal flow J6 V (H)
(RACK1) (RACK2)
NN1 white label white label NN2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 101. System cabling: types of used cables (KK, NN, PP)
ED 03
514
Q: 9–pins Cannon male 300 / 9–pins Cannon male
R1
ED 03
514
S: 1–channel extension
S1
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
signal flow
S2
Sub.ADM STM n
J1 Sub.ADM STM n
J2
yellow label
green label
RRA n
J2
yellow label
S3
RRA n
J1
signal flow
green label
S4
T: CAN–bus terminator
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
4.4 Power supply distribution connections
N.B. For CABLE TYPE and CABLE SIDE related information, please refer to para.4.3 on page 183.
Tab. 34. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT CABLE KIT
Cables belonging to FANS UNIT CABLE KIT
CABLE CABLE SIDE (B2) & LABEL
N. CABLE SIDE (B1) & LABEL
TYPE (N.B.2)
1 Fans Unit down (up) / M1 Batt.A (N.B.5) T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 5A
B
1 Fans Unit down (up) / M4 Batt.B (N.B.5) T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 5B
Tab. 35. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT EXTENSION CABLE KIT
CABLE CABLE SIDE (B2) & LABEL
N. CABLE SIDE (B1) & LABEL
TYPE (N.B.2)
1 Fans Unit down (up) / M1 Batt.A (N.B.6) T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 6A
B
1 Fans Unit down (up) / M4 Batt.B (N.B.6) T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 6B
Tab. 36. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL
FOR WMSN
CABLE CABLE SIDE (A2) & LABEL
N. CABLE SIDE (A1) & LABEL
TYPE (N.B.2)
1 ADM CONGI / C1 (N.B.7) T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 4A
A
1 ADM SERGI / S1 (N.B.7) T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 4B
ED 03
514
4.5 Signal connections between shelves
N.B. For CABLE TYPE and CABLE SIDE related information, please refer to para.4.3 on page 183.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
Tab. 37. Signal connections: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Tab. 38. Signal connections: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT CABLE KIT and FANS UNIT
EXTENSION CABLE KIT
ED 03
514
Tab. 39. Signal connections: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL FOR
WMSN
CABLE 1st. SIDE CABLE 2nd SIDE
ED 03
514
4.6 Modem–Transceiver–Branching connections
The connections among Modems, Transceivers and Branching depend on the following possible
configurations:
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
ED 03
514
a) Without Reuse and without Diversity
N.B. For CABLE TYPE and CABLE SIDE related information, please refer to para.4.3 on page
183.
For the connections between TRANSCEIVER unit and Rx / Tx Branching, refer to documents cited
in para.3.8.1 on page 168.
Requirements:
• MODEM does not need any CANC–COMB module (see Fig. 74. on page 151)
• TRANSCEIVER:
ED 03
514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
TX RX
BRANCHING TRANSCEIVER SHELF BRANCHING BASE BAND SHELF
03
955.203.292 Q
G1
G2
J5
J6
J5
J1
J4
J3
J2
J14
MODEM n
J9
J10
J11
F2
F1
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
TRANSCEIVER n
195 / 514
b) Without Reuse and with Diversity
N.B. For CABLE TYPE and CABLE SIDE related information, please refer to para.4.3 on page
183.
For the connections between TRANSCEIVER unit and Rx / Tx Branching, refer to documents cited
in para.3.8.1 on page 168.
Requirements:
• MODEM needs one CANC–COMB module (see Fig. 74. on page 151)
• TRANSCEIVER:
ED 03
514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
TX RX
TRANSCEIVER SHELF BRANCHING BASE BAND SHELF
BRANCHING
03
955.203.292 Q
H1
G1
G2
H2
J2
J1
J5
J6
J3
J5
J1
J4
J3
J2
J14
MODEM n
J9
J10
J11
F2
F1
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
TRANSCEIVER n
197 / 514
c) With Reuse and without Diversity
N.B. For CABLE TYPE and CABLE SIDE related information, please refer to para.4.3 on page
183.
The connections must be done between two contiguous pairs of channels, i.e.:
• (MODEM 0 + TRANSCEIVER 0) connected to (MODEM 1 + TRANSCEIVER 1)
• (MODEM 2 + TRANSCEIVER 2) connected to (MODEM 3 + TRANSCEIVER 3)
• ....
• (MODEM 8 + TRANSCEIVER 8) connected to (MODEM 9 + TRANSCEIVER 9)
For the connections between TRANSCEIVER unit and Rx / Tx Branching, refer to documents cited
in para.3.8.1 on page 168.
Requirements:
• both MODEMs need one CANC–COMB module (see Fig. 74. on page 151)
• TRANSCEIVERs: the two transceivers are configured differently from each other:
ED 03
514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
RX
TX TRANSCEIVER SHELF BRANCHING BASE BAND SHELF
BRANCHING
03
955.203.292 Q
K1
F1
G1
N1
G2
F2
J5
J6
J14
J5
J1
J4
J3
J2
H (V)
J9
J10
J11
MODEM EVEN
K2
TRANSCEIVER H (V)
TRANSCEIVER V (H)
K2
J5
J6
J5
J1
J4
J3
J2
J14
V (H)
J9
J10
J11
F2
MODEM EVEN +1
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
G2
N2
G1
K1
F1
199 / 514
d) With Reuse and with Diversity
N.B. For CABLE TYPE and CABLE SIDE related information, please refer to para.4.3 on page
183.
The connections must be done between two contiguous pairs of channels, i.e.:
• (MODEM 0 + TRANSCEIVER 0) connected to (MODEM 1 + TRANSCEIVER 1)
• (MODEM 2 + TRANSCEIVER 2) connected to (MODEM 3 + TRANSCEIVER 3)
• ....
• (MODEM 8 + TRANSCEIVER 8) connected to (MODEM 9 + TRANSCEIVER 9)
For the connections between TRANSCEIVER unit and Rx / Tx Branching, refer to documents cited
in para.3.8.1 on page 168.
Requirements:
• both MODEMs need two CANC–COMB modules (see Fig. 74. on page 151)
• TRANSCEIVERs: the two transceivers are configured differently from each other:
ED 03
514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
RX
TX TRANSCEIVER SHELF BRANCHING BASE BAND SHELF
BRANCHING
03
N1
955.203.292 Q
H1
P1
F1
G1
G2
F2
H2
J2
J1
J5
J6
J3
J14
J5
J1
J4
J3
J2
H (V)
J9
J10
J11
MODEM EVEN
P2
TRANSCEIVER H (V)
TRANSCEIVER V (H)
P2
J2
J1
J5
J6
J3
J5
J1
J4
J3
J2
J14
V (H)
J9
J10
J11
H2
F2
MODEM EVEN +1
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
G2
G1
H1
P1
F1
N2
201 / 514
4.7 External interfaces
– Electrical interfaces
The connector used is Siemens, 1.0/2.3 75–ohm male coax.
The main characteristics are reported in para.6.4.3 on page 329.
– Optical interfaces
The connector used is SC/PC or FC/PC.
The main characteristics are reported in para.6.4.3 on page 329.
For Optical Safety refer to para.6.8 on page 339.
The Subrack Access Area provides external access for WST channels by Siemens connectors, 1.0/2.3
75–ohm male coax.
The main characteristics are reported in para.6.4.3 on page 329.
Maximum cables number: N.8 inputs and N.8 outputs on BaseBand Subrack access area; see para.4.2.3
on page 180.
Input /Output WST protected is available on Service unit (see para.3.6.3 on page 144)
The connector used is Siemens 1.0/2.3 75–ohm male coax.
The main characteristics are reported in para.6.4.3 on page 329.
ED 03
514
4.7.5 Auxiliary Channels
The Subrack Access Area provides external access for auxiliary channels by three SUB–D 25 pins female
connectors specified in the following.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
inserted/
N. bit/s Format Connector wires Notes
extracted
asynchronous
M182 on BB access
1 9600 V24/V28 RSOH/RFCOH 2
area. See
(selectable)
Tab. 42. on page
3 64k G703 RSOH/RFCOH 204 12
64k RSOH/RFCOH
M191 on BB access
3
RSOH/RFCOH area. See (SW configurable)
or V11 24
64K/128K (128 K) only Tab. 44. on page connected to 1 or
2+1
RFCOH 206 2 bytes
RJ11
Connector (J5) on
1 Speech telephonic RSOH/RFCOH 2 EOW
Service Unit
(Fig. 69. page 145)
Analog
3 Speech I/O –3dBm RSOH/RFCOH 12
Party line
M190 on BB access
1 Speech I/O –3dBm RFCOH area. See 4 TPH
Tab. 43. on page
205 Available on
Out 400 mW EOW
1 Speech 2 Remote Unit
4 ohm (only extract)
to loudspeaker
M182 on BB access
area. See
1 64k G703 RFCOH or ADM 4 TPH to ADM
Tab. 42. on page
204
ED 03
514
Tab. 42. Aux channel G703 and RS232 – BB shelf’s M182 connector pinout
ED 03
514
Tab. 43. Out party line OW, TPH and loudspeaker – BB shelf’s M190 connector pinout
ED 03
514
Tab. 44. Aux channel V11 – BB shelf’s M191 connector pinout
ED 03
514
4.7.6 Management interfaces
The System Controller unit (see Fig. 67. on page 141) provides the following external access points:
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
Tab. 45. RJ45 Connector for 10baseT interface on System Controller unit
Pin Signal
1 TPTXP
2 TPTXN
3 TPRXP
4
5
6 TPRXN
7
8 GND
RS232 RJ45
PAIR WIRE COLOR
(SAM side) (PC side)
1 A Not used Not used White / Blue ring
1 B Not used Not used Blue
2 A 5 4 White / Orange ring
2 B Not used Not used Orange
3 A 3 8 White / Green ring
3 B 2 7 Green
4 A Not used Not used White / Brown ring
4 B Not used Not used Brown
N.B. The special cable needed to connect the CRAFT TERMINAL to the system is supplied with
the equipment.
ED 03
514
4.7.7 Station Alarms
Station alarm interface access is provided in TRU unit, connectors (M1) to (M5); see Fig. 94. on page 176.
I/O N I/O N
The interface characteristics here indicated apply both to summarizing alarms and housekeeping alarms:
– The presence of active alarm correspond to closed relay contact with a common wire available to
the customer.
– Electrical characteristics (V is voltage between the warm and the common wires) are:
ED 03
514
4.7.8.2 Out Housekeeping and Remote alarms
Summarizing and Out Housekeeping interface access is provided by means of three SUB–D 25–pins
female connectors on Access area subrack specified in the following tables Tab. 48. thru’ Tab. 50.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
For the meaning of the signals, please refer to Tab. 62. on page 364.
Tab. 48. Out Remote alarms (GA1–GA20) – BB shelf’s M193 connector pinout
ED 03
514
Tab. 49. Out Remote alarms (GA21–GA40) – BB shelf’s M183 connector pinout
ED 03
514
Tab. 50. Out Housekeeping and Remote alarms (GA41–GA48) – BB shelf’s M192
connector pinout
ED 03
514
4.7.8.3 Input Housekeeping alarms
Summarizing and Out Housekeeping interface access is provided by means of one SUB–D 25–pins
female connector on Access area subrack specified in the following Tab. 51. herebelow.
ED 03
514
Tab. 52. Input Housekeeping – Additional Housekeeping unit’s M1 connector pinout
ED 03
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
214 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
5 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
5.1 Introduction
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
The general block diagrams for LHR and WMSN configurations are respectively shown in following
document, use and communication of its contents
DCCR
WST 2Mb/s
RRA SW RFCOH MD TR
DCCR
WST 2Mb/s
DCCR
DCCR
ECT F
EOW
DCCR 64 Kb
QB3 SC SERVICE WST 2Mb/s
OS
DCCR
DCCR
CMI 0 MD TR
RRA RFCOH
DISTRIB.
RADIO
PROTECTION
RRA SW RFCOH MD TR
CMI 7
DCCR
WST 2Mb/s
RRA SW RFCOH MD TR
DCCR
WST 2Mb/s
1650SMC
CMI 2 RRA SW RFCOH MD TR
CMI 1
DCCR
DCCR
CMI 0
F EOW
DCCR 64 Kb
QB3 SC SERVICE WST 2Mb/s
Nx64
Kb DCCR
DCCR
RRA RFCOH MD TR
DISTRIB.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ECT OS RADIO
PROTECTION
ED 03
514
This chapter describes in detail the functional operation of LHR equipment.
This handbook gives no detailed information on 1650SM–C equipment. For this purpose,
please refer to 1650SM–C specific documentation (see para.18.2.2.2 on page 471) with the
The handbook parts that should be read before starting this chapter are:
ED 03
514
5.2 Equipment Control Subsystem
The equipment control subsystem is the full set of software facilities and the full set of hardware items,
devices and connections necessary to support such software.
This paragraph provides the overall architecture of this subsystem describing the macro functionalities
performed (reported in the following in italic character) and partitioning these functionalities into hardware
and software components.
5.2.1.1 Functionalities
Digital transmission systems can be broadly described as a collection of multiplexing, framing, transport,
routeing, timing and protection processes. Each of these processes can be decomposed into a collection
of atomic functions. These atomic functions interact with other functionalities, the equipment management
functionalities, which provide the atomic functions with configuration data and monitor the signals they are
processing, providing performance monitoring and alarms conditions to an external management system,
which is able to access to these information by means of communication functions.
Thus, the product functionalities can be broadly described according to the following functional
decomposition (see Fig. 111. herebelow):
fault &
performance
atomic monitoring
function
atomic
function DCC line side
EMF MCF
DCC–R radio side
atomic
function
configuration &
provisioning Q F
The generic supervision process inside the NE, describes the way in which the occurrence of a
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
disturbance or fault is analyzed with the purpose of providing an appropriate indication of performance
and/or detected fault condition.
ED 03
514
Transmission and equipment supervision processes are concerned with the management of the
transmission resources in the network and they are only interested in the functionality provided by a NE.
They require a functional representation of the NE that is implementation independent.
Any equipment fault is represented by the unavailability of the affected functions because the transmission
management has no knowledge of the equipment as such. Equipment supervision process is concerned
with the fault localization and repair of the equipment itself. It does not require a knowledge of the
transmission network.
The supervision process is performed both in the atomic functions and in the management functions, so
it can be decomposed into major sub–processes: atomic function fault management and performance
monitoring, management function fault management, management function performance monitoring and
radio performance monitoring (see Fig. 112. herebelow). These processes are described in the next
paragraphs.
cZZZ rpZZZ
ED 03
514
5.2.1.2 Atomic Functions
The following Fig. 113. shows the supervision process inside the atomic functions. The anomalies
integration, consequent action control and defects correlations functions are components of the fault
management process and are performed both in the trail termination function and in trail adaptation
function. The performance monitoring primitives processing function represent the performance
monitoring process and is performed only inside the trail termination function.
The output signals cZZZ are the input signals for the management function fault management process,
while the output signals pZZZ are the input signals for the management function performance monitoring
process.
1 second primitives
Anomalies Perf. Mon. pZZZ/rpZZZ
Defects
Primitives
Processing
Near end
Anomalies Anomalies
Integration
Near end Fault Cause
defects cZZZ
dZZZ
Defects
Correlation
Consequent
Actions report options
aZZZ Consequent enable/disable
Actions
Control
consequent action control process for each specific atomic function is described in the related
sections.
This function is performed by HW.
ED 03
514
– Defects correlation (f3)
Defect correlation process provides correlation to reduce the amount of information offered to the
EMF. It determines, from a set of activated defects, which fault is present.
This function is performed by SW.
In order to simplify the reading of this table, it could be useful to remember the meaning of the RSPI
functional block (see ITU–R 750 and ETS 300 635). It represents the radio frequency signal conversion
into an internal logic level STM–1 signal, and vice–versa. It contains the following radio functions (see
Fig. 114. below):
– Modulation and TX functions in the Transmit side
– Demodulation and RX functions in the Receive side
Receive Demodulation
function function
Radio side
Transmit Modulation
function function
If it is not possible to distinguish between loss of signal and internal failure for a given subfunction with a
sufficient degree of confidence, the minimal set of defect should be txFail, modFail, rxFail and demFail.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
Tab. 53. Fault management process
SPI source – – – –
(electrical)
SPI sink Loss of Signal AIS – Loss Of Signal
(electrical/optical)
Loss of Frame AIS not Loss of Signal Loss Of Frame
RST source – – – –
RST sink Trace Identifier AIS not (Loss of Signal or Trace Identifier
(line side) Mismatch Loss of Frame) Mismatch
RST sink Trace Identifier AIS (1) Trace Identifier
(radio side) Mismatch Mismatch
RSPI – RFCOH – – – –
source
RSPI – RFCOH Loss of Frame AIS not (rxLOS or rxFail Loss Of Frame
sink or demLOS or –
demFail)
Radio Channel AIS not (rxLOS or rxFail Radio Channel
Identifier Mismatch or demLOS Identifier Mismatch
or demFail
or Loss of Frame)
RSPI source txLOS – – txLOS
txFail – not txLOS (2) txFail
(2) This defect correlation is different from the one reported in draft MI/TM–4048 (stable part)
In unbalanced configurations, defects coming from the unbalanced channels and generated from the not
working function (Rx or Tx) must be inhibited.
ED 03
514
Performance monitoring process
The requirements for the performance monitoring is to provide both performance monitoring quality of
service (SDH regenerator section quality of service and typical radio sections quality of service) and
ADM LHR
Regenerator Section
Two different radio sections must be monitored (see Fig. 116. below):
a) Hop Section: the section between two radio stations inside the protection section. Due to
the RPS location it is not possible to perform the monitoring of the hop section by means
of standard methodologies. It must be provided in a proprietary way by means of Forward
Error Correction.
b) Link Section: the section identifying the protected section (the section outside the radio
protection switching). The performance monitoring of the radio link section may be
performed by using B1 bytes at each side of the section. Methodology used to provide this
performance monitoring are defined in DEN/TM 2246, ETS 300 417 series and ITU–T rec.
G.783, G.784 and G.829.
LHR/WMSN LHR/WMSN
... RST RPS RFCOH RSPI RSPI RFCOH RPS RST ...
Radio HOP
Radio LINK
ED 03
514
b) Radio specific parameter monitoring
Radio specific performance monitoring deals with monitoring of the radio specific functional blocks
RSPI and RPS. The parameters provided by this PM is used in close conjunction with the ordinary
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
The global performance monitoring process performed in the LHR atomic functions is described in
the following Fig. 117. This process is completely applicable to the WMSN equipment. In this case
the PM related to the functional blocks performed by the WADM/WLT (i.e. at multiplex section level
by using B2 bytes) are added.
to EMF to EMF
The one second primitives processing performs an integration of reported anomalies and defects by
counting them during a one second interval. At the end of each one second interval the contents of
the counters is made available to the performance monitoring process within the EMF for further
processing. Hereafter these performance primitives are described:
ED 03
514
• Received Level Threshold Second (RLTS)
A Received Level Second is generated if in one second period the detected RL is below a
predefined threshold. The threshold value is also expressed in minus dBm. At least two RLS
events are required corresponding to two different threshold values (TBD).
Hereafter the performance primitives that don’t require one second filter are described:
The following Tab. 54. reports, for each atomic function, the entity monitored by the performance
primitives and the one second primitives provided to EMF for further processing.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
Tab. 54. Entities monitored by the performance monitoring primitives
SPI source – – –
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
(electrical/optical)
RST source – – –
(line and radio side)
SPI sink Frame Alignment Out Of Frame OFS
(electrical/optical)
RST sink SDH RS Errored Block N_EBC
(line side)
Transm. Def. => LOS, N_DS
LOF,
TIM)
Eqpt Def. => EQ
RST sink Radio Link Section Errored Block N_EBC
(radio side)
Transm. Def. => N_DS
demLOS,
LOF,
RCIM,
TIM
(1) Eqpt
Def. => EQ
RSPI source Transmitted level TL > Thres. 3 TLTS–3
TL > Thres. 4 (opt.) TLTS–4
RSPI – RFCOH sink Frame Alignment Out Of Frame OFS
RSPI sink Received level RL < Thres. 1 RLTS–1
RL < Thres. 2 RLTS–2
RL < Thres. N (opt.) RLTS–N
Radio Hop (2) FEC N_EBC
Transm. Def. => rxLOS, N_DS
rxFail,
demLOS,
demFail,
LOF,
RCIM
Eqpt Def. => EQ
RPS Protection switch actual PSA PSAC
PSAD
Protection switch failed FSRC
FSRD
by the channel currently working (RPS protection), the same defects generated by the channel
currently in standby state are not considered as performance primitives.
(2) Radio Hop performance monitoring hasn’t be provided in N+0 configurations.
ED 03
514
5.2.1.2.2 Test management process
In LHR NEs line and internal loopbacks can be performed at different levels, as described in para.2.6.4
on page 93.
ED 03
514
5.2.1.3 Management Functions
The management functions are handled by means of synchronous equipment management function block
described in the following figure. It provides the means through which the synchronous network element
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
SEMF
AFs
NER MAF MCF
configuration &
provisioning
The SEMF interacts with the atomic functions by exchanging information across the MP reference points.
This information flow is related to configuration and provisioning data and to anomalies and defects
detected in the atomic functions. The EMF contains a number of filters that provide supervision process
by means of a data reduction mechanism on the information received across the MP reference points. The
filters outputs are available to the management application functions (MAF), via the network element
resources (NER). The NER provide event processing and data storage, while the MAF process the
information provide to and by the NER. The MAF represents the information as managed object according
to the object oriented approach.
The MAF converts performance data and implementation specific hardware alarms into object oriented
messages for transmission on DCC–R channel and/or on Q interface. It also converts object oriented
messages coming from external manager into internal specific messages for AF configuration.
The information to and from MAF is provide by means of the message communication function (MCF).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
5.2.1.3.1 Supervision process
Alarms
Logging
Fault Cause
Fault Cause Severity
Persistency Assignment
Alarms
MCF
Reporting
Station
Alarms
All the equipment defects (including the ASICs faults) must be reported per replaceable unit. If a
replaceable unit is reported as being faulty, all the signals processed by this unit are assumed to be
interrupted. The atomic function performed by this unit will represent this situation activating the
performance primitive Defect Second (DS).
ED 03
514
Performance monitoring process
The one second primitives related to the SDH regenerator section quality of service and typical radio
section quality of service must to be processed to determine the performance events (ES, SES, BBE). This
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
Monitored
Second
Y
Defect ?
(p_DS)
N Anomalies?
(p_EBC >0)
Y
EB >=2400 ?
N N
Available Available
State ? State ?
Y Y
ES = ES +1
BBE = BBE + EB SES = SES +1
Data
Collection
ED 03
514
The following Fig. 121. shows the PM process inside the management functions.
Performance Reporting
QOS Alarm
Performance Events
SES ES BBE
Event processing
– EMF performance monitoring event processing (PM filter: f13, f14, f15, f16)
ED 03
514
5.2.1.3.2 Configuration and provisioning process
The information flow over the MP reference points related to configuration and provisioning data is
described in details for each atomic function in ETS 300 417 series and in G.783. It is to be noted the
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
necessity to provide to the RFCOH atomic functions with the following information:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
– the radio channel identifier expected value (to be compared with the one received on radio side,
functionality performed sink side)
– the radio channel identifier value to be inserted in frame (functionality performed source side)
This information flow refers both to configuration and provisioning data passed to the atomic functions and
to status reports coming from the atomic function as response to a request from SEMF.
The channel number associated to each RT position and the definition of which positions assume
the spare rule in the radio protection scheme (RPS) must be configured by ECT operator.
Software download process (local and remote) has the same feature already implemented for new
generation of the Alcatel equipment. In synthesis:
– this process is hitless and causes no loss of control functionality when in progress
– a roll back to previous release is available when problems arises with the new software version.
5.2.1.3.4 Security
Events are time stamped with the resolution of one second (according to G.784).
ED 03
514
5.2.1.4 Message Communication Functions
This function provides facilities for the transport of the TMN messages. It receives and buffers messages
from the DCC, Q and F interfaces and from EMF. Messages not addressed to the local site are relayed
NE 1 NE 2 NE 3
TMN
Q interface
When the access to the TMN is provided by the Q interface, it will be conform to the ITU–T G.773.
F interface
– F protocol stack
DCC interface
Only DCCR are managed in the MCF in case of LHR (line and radio side). DCCR and DCCM are
managed, line side, in case of WADM/WLT
ED 03
514
5.2.1.5 Protections
Several types of protections are present in LHR equipment. They can be categorized into two classes: trail
and equipment protection.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
Radio Protection is a trail protection. It is used to provide protection for a working channel. Generally, this
function provides ”m” protection channels for ”n” signals against trail associated failures, both for hardware
failure and temporary signal degradation or losses due to propagation effects (e.g. rain or multipath
phenomena).The signal on the working channel is protected. This type of protection is performed by
switching a working channel to a protection section when the working section fails or when its performance
falls below the required level. A RPS function is used to perform the switching between the protection and
working section. The status of the sections is made available to the RPS function to allow it to decide when
an automatic switch should be performed.
Protection architectures
LHR equipment can support two different protection architectures : 1+1 or M:N. They are
characterized by the detection of failure events by the RSPI function; and the resultant
reconfiguration uses the protection switching functions that are in the RPS.
• A 1+1 protection architecture has one working (protected) trail supporting one normal traffic
signal, one protection (protecting) trail and a permanent bridge.
At the source end, the normal traffic signal is permanently bridged to both working and
protection trail. At the sink end, the condition of the two traffic signals are monitored and the
better of the two is selected.
Due to permanent bridging, the 1+1 architecture does not allow an extra unprotected traffic
signal to be provided.
In 1+1 architecture single ended switching is provided. The switching is complete when the
traffic signal (service) is selected from protection trail at the end detecting the fault. The sink end
transfers the traffic signal (service) without communication with the source end.
This architecture is used both in revertive and non–revertive mode.
Protection
Section
RFCOH RSPI RSPI RFCOH
Working
Section
RFCOH RSPI RSPI RFCOH
NE A NE B
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
• A M:N protection architecture has N working (protected) trails supporting a normal traffic signal
and M protecting trail that may support the normal signal (if a protection switch is active) or an
extra traffic signal or a null signal (if no protection switch is active),
At the source end, when a defect condition is detected on a working trail, or under the effect of
Protection
Section
RST RFCOH RSPI RSPI RFCOH RST
.
.. . . . .
.. . . . .
.. . . .
Working
Section
RST RFCOH RSPI RSPI RFCOH RST
NE A NE B
Operation Type
M:N architecture is always revertive, 1+1 architecture may be revertive or not, this parameter can
be set by the management system, in revertive case it is possible to specify if the restore has to act
on channel 0 or on channel 1. In revertive mode of operation, the working channel is switched back
to the working section when the working section has recovered from failure or when a switch
command is released. In non–revertive mode of operation, the switch is maintained even after
recovery from failure or release of a switch command.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
Switching Initiation Criteria Priority Management
When more than one switch request are present, the highest priority is served. Refer to the list given
in the following Tab. 55. This information cannot be set up by the management system.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
1 Lockout
2 Forced Switch
7 Manual Switch
8 Wait To Restore
10 Exercise [1]
11 No Request
N.B. [1] Do Not Revert and Exercise Request have been listed in this order because an
exercise request can only be performed when the protection channel is not in use.
Another priority criteria is associated to each channel. This information is used to select the channel
of highest priority when different channels have the same switch request. This priority may be set up
by the management system.
Lockout, forced and manual switch, exercise are external requests (from management system). In
the following some of these RPS requests are explained.
• Lockout
The lockout RPS request is applicable to a working and to a protection trail, in both cases it
excludes one trail (working or protecting) from protection schema. In fact it prevents a working
trail from being protected and it prevents a protection trail from being used for protection.
• Exercise
Exercising the RPS is done in order to detect silent failures on the RPS. The exercise operation
performs all the steps to perform a switch except for the actual switch.
Two types of exercise may be used:
a) Single exercise: the operator send one command to perform a single exercise. At the end
of the operation, the NE returns the result to the OS.
b) Continuous Exercise: after starting by the operator, the exercise operation is repeated till
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
• Automatic Switch Initiation Criteria
An automatic switch is only initiated upon detection of a failure at the receiving end(i.e. Sink
side). If a failure occurs at the transmission end (i.e. Source side), an automatic switch will be
initiated by the remote(i.e. far end) network element when it detects the failure at its receiving
• Wait to restore
In the revertive mode, a working channel will be switched back to its working section when the
working section has recovered from its failure. In order to prevent several protection switches
due to an intermittent failure, a failed section must be fault–free during a fixed period of time
called wait–to–restore(WTR) period before it can be used again by a working channel. An Auto
Switch condition will override the WTR period.
The WRT period is not configurable by the management system.
In the non–revertive mode, when the working section has recovered from its failure it will go
directly to the ”Do Not Revert” state.
No EPS is provided on tributary and aggregate (WADM/WLT subrack) units. As consequence the clock
reference unit function (on board the aggregate unit) is not protected.
No protection of the units composing the control subsystem (i.e. ’System Controller’ and ’Service’ units)
is envisaged (the payload traffic is not affected by their loss, because configuration data are present also,
and thus survive, on the peripheral units). Equipment configuration data, as a whole, are contained in a
non–volatile memory in the ’System Controller’ unit. Such data can be back–upped and restored to/from
the Equipment Craft Terminal/OS in order to limit the eventual reconfiguration of the NE to the delta
between the back up configuration and the state before the crash is occurred.
ED 03
514
5.2.2 Control Subsystem Hardware Architecture
This paragraph describes the control subsystem hardware architecture, defines the control elements, the
function partitioning among them and the external and internal interfaces managed by this subsystem.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
The control subsystem provides the resources to support the communication interfaces and the
processing functions required by the TMN.
As described in the previous para.5.2.1 on page 217 (Control Subsystem Hardware Architecture), the
functionalities performed by the control subsystem can be summarized as follows:
– Message Communication Function (MCF)
– Synchronous Equipment Management Function (SEMF)
• Virtual Machine Management Function (VMMF)
• Physical Machine Management Function on whole equipment basis (PMMF/E)
• Physical Machine Management Function on unit basis (PMMF/U)
– Basic Functions (BF)
Each of these functionality groups includes functions with similar characteristics in terms of scope of
operation and performance requirements. In fact:
– MCF have to support a high routing throughput and don’t require a high availability
– Management functions don’t require a strict real time processing and a high availability
– BF require a strict real time processing and high availability
The control elements logical hierarchy is depicted in Fig. 125. on page 238.
The functionalities are splitted on the control elements composing the control subsystem architecture.
Equipment Controller
One EC has in charge the MCF and VMMF: it provides resources (physical interfaces and protocol
stack) required for the communication between NE and the management systems (OS and ECT),
it performs all the control and management functions of the virtual machine (info model).
No protection of this control element is performed. The EC is physically located aboard the System
Controller board.
Radio Controller
One RC has in charge the PMMF/E: it provides the resources to support the control and management
functions related to the real physical machine.
No protection of this control element is performed. The RC is physically located aboard the System
Controller board.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
Supervisory Units
The SUs have in charge the PMMF/U and the AF. This function requires a real time processing of
the data coming from the ASICs. The SU on board of each unit has the aim to provide an uniform
OS
QB3
F
ECT ISSB
EC RC
System Controller
CAN
SU SU
ED 03
514
5.2.2.1.3 Communication interfaces
A set of (serial and parallel) interfaces are defined as part of the control sub–system to support the
communication task.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All the communication links used by the different processing functions (RC and EC) to exchange data each
other or to read/write data from/to the controlled objects (ASICs or other devices on board the different
cards in the equipment) are defined as internal interfaces.
External interfaces are defined as the communication links provided by the control sub–system towards
external devices used for Operation and Maintenance functions or system debug activities.
All the interfaces are reported in Fig. 126. with the association of the units supporting these interfaces.
EC
ISSB
RC
SC
CAN
RT Inv.
Mem.
uP
RT–n
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
– External Interfaces
The control sub–system provides the following external communication interfaces:
• QB3 interface
• F interface
– Internal Interfaces
The control sub–system provides the following internal communication interfaces:
• ISSB (Intra Shelf Serial Bus) interface
• CAN interface
• SPI interface
The ”ISSB” (Intra Shelf Serial Bus) interface is basically an equipment–internal Local Area Network
for communications among the different microprocessors in the same shelf: the EC processor and
the RC processor and other possible processors. It is a multimaster HDLC–based backplane serial
bus.
The “CAN” interface allows to connect the RC processor to the microprocessor on board the units.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
It is a serial broadcast bus, each node connected to the bus receives all the messages sent by the
other ones. A local filtering mechanism on each node permit to manage only the messages related
to the node. The maximum speed is 1 Mbit/s up to 40 meters length.
ED 03
514
5.2.2.2 WMSN control subsystem architecture
The main characteristics of the WMSN control subsystem architecture are the following (see
Fig. 127. herebelow):
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
This means that from the management system point of view this equipment is seen as two different
network elements (both of them with an own address). In this way the LHR and ADM hardware control
architecture are reused without any modification, allowing to preserve the independence of the
software developments of the ADM and radio parts.
– Only one F and QB3 interface
The F and QB3 interfaces are present on the ADM part. The radio part sees the TMN information
by means of Qecc interfaces. RECT application is used to manage both the ADM part (directly
connected) and the radio part (via Qecc).
RECT OS
F QB3
SC EC EC RC
SPI
ISPB CAN
ED 03
514
5.2.3 Control Subsystem Software Architecture
This paragraph describes the software architecture of the equipment control subsystem.
The software implemented functions can be divided into the following groups:
ED 03
514
5.2.3.1.2 Module Decomposition
According to the functional decomposition described in the previous para.5.2.3.1.1 on page 242, the
partitioning of the software into the main design entities, the function and the purpose of each of them are
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
described hereafter.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
The Virtual Machine Manager is composed of two main parts (see Fig. 128. on page 244):
VHM manages the communication with the RC function both in terms of application data (it
sends to the RC the provisioning data and receives status and alarms) and in terms of
communication driver. The messages exchanged between EC and RC are logical messages
(information model oriented).
This component stores to persistent memory the data configuration coming from the
management systems.
Physical Machine Manager provides a proprietary representation of the managed system in terms
of transmission resources and physical resources. It implements the PMM functions and generally
provides the conversion between the data how they are known from the physical machine and the
info model representation based on managed objects.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
External Communication Service
NEFA Specific
(NEFA–S)
NEFA
From the software architecture point of view, this equipment is composed by two completely independent
parts, with different aims:
ED 03
514
5.2.4 Signal Management
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0 NU NU
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ ÇÇ
B1 MD MD E1 MD F1 NU NU
ÇÇÇÇ
D1 MD MD D2 MD D3
ÇÇÇÇ
ADMINISTRATIVE UNIT OVERHEAD
B2 B2 B2 K1 K2
D4 D5 D6
ÇÇÇÇ
D7 D8 D9
ÇÇÇÇ
D10
S1
D11
M1
D12
E2 NU NU ÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
RFCOH channels 2xWST channels
(2 columns) (8 columns)
ÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÇÇ
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0 NU NU
ÇÇ ÇÇ
B1 MD MD E1 MD F1 NU NU
ÇÇ ÇÇ
D1 MD MD D2 MD D3
ÇÇ ÇÇ
ADMINISTRATIVE UNIT OVERHEAD
B2 B2 B2 K1 K2
D4 D5 D6
ÇÇ ÇÇ
D7 D8 D9
ÇÇ ÇÇ
D10
S1
D11
M1
D12
E2 NU NU ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇ
RFCOH channels
(2 columns)
ED 03
514
5.2.4.2 STM–0 frame structure
ÇÇÇÇ
STM0 + RFCOH (2 columns)
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
The Multiplex Section Remote Error Indication (MS–REI) M1 is re–routed inside the STM–0 frame
from byte #(9,6) of STM–1 frame.
A single WST channel (2.048 Kbit/s) is composed by 36 bytes as described in the following:
Information (1 byte) 1st byte
WST_POH (1 byte)
Information (8 bytes)
Information (8 bytes)
Information (8 bytes)
Information (6 bytes)
36th byte
ED 03
514
The characteristics of the frame are resumed in the following table:
Channel
Symbol
n. Code spacing Re–use
∆f/Sr
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
[Mbit/s]
40 1.612 Yes
30.0 1.209 Yes
STM–1 2 280 7.69% 24.812 29.65 1.195 Yes
29.0 1.168 Yes
28.0 1.128 No
STM–1 1 272 7.69% 24.103 28.0 1.161 Yes
The STM–1 signal with 0 WST channel is used only for special application (frequency re–use operation
in 28 channel spacing).
The STM–0 signal with 1_WST is derived directly from the STM–1 frame with 2_WST channels dividing
by three.
The structure of SERVICE CHANNELS inside the RFCOH area is the following:
RFCOH
column xx column yy
DSI 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8
ATPC 1.9 1.10 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6
D1 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4
D2 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 4.1 4.2
D3 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10
E1 5.1 5.2 K0
F1 reserved for service channel
reserved for service channel reserved for service channel
reserved for service channel reserved for service channel
The decision to select the MC signal coming from ch_ 0 or ch_1 is implemented according to the local DEM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
SOH MANAGEMENT
This block diagram of Fig. 129. herebelow shows some connection for SOH bytes management:
Available bytes with standard interface (NxG.703) and with RS385 interface (NxV11).
CH_0
Cross–connection matrix RFCOH
CH_1 CH_0
CH_2
CH_1
CH N BYPASS FUNCTION
E1
F1
ATPC
1.8
DSI
1.9 MC
SOH BUS 2.2 E1
2.3 F1
2.5 D1
2.6 D2
2.8 D3
2.9 CH1 (#)
3.2 CH2 (#)
3.3 CH3 (#)
3.5 CH4 (#)
3.6 CH5 (#)
3.8
3.9
EXTERNAL INTERFACES
ED 03
514
In case of RRA application, the access to SOH bytes is provided by RRA itself; in case of WADM and WLT
application, the access to SOH bytes is concentrated in the baseband part implementing WADM/WLT
functionality.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
Each RSOH_byte, if terminated, must be terminated and accessible both at radio–side and line–side. The
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
E1
F1
#1.8, #1.9,
#2.2, #2.3, #2.5, #2.6, #2.8, #2.9,
#3.2. #3.3, #3.5, #3.6, #3.8, #3.9
In WADM/WLT terminal application with radio repeater, when a specific service channel must be dropped
in the regenerator, the interested RSOH byte is re–routed in the RFCOH area according with the service
channel columns format (1152 Kbit/s stream):
Column 1 Column 2
DSI MC
ATPC MC
D1 MC
D2 MC
D3 MC
E1 FAIL serv + K0
F1 Channel #3
Channel #1 Channel #4
Channel #2 Channel #5
ED 03
514
RSOH standard_bytes
pass–through function
RSOH termination
E1
F1
USER INTERFACES
D1, D2, D3
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CROSS CONNECTION
MATRIX FOR
SERVICE CHANNELS
ATPC
DSI
MC
RSOH termination
RST RFCOH
RSOH standard_bytes
pass–through function
ED 03
514
The line side SOH bytes can be managed on the ten RST sections available in the maximum system
configuration ( 8+0 or 7+1 ).
MSOH bypassed
Inside the RRA unit the “pass–through function” of RSOH bytes is provided, in order to transmit
channels coming from ADM line equipment in “transparent mode” through the radio system.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
DCCR Management
RFCOH SECTION
RST SECTION CH_0
Line–side Radio–side
CK+SYNC REF
EPLD
CK+SYNC
EPLD CK+SYNC
ED 03
514
CK+SYNC
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Radio–side Line–side
DCCR demapping
DCCR from 6.48 Mb BUS
DCCR extraction mapping & insertion line side
EPLD
CK+SYNC
ED 03
514
Notes (see figure below):
– On RST section the DCCR are inserted/extracted by dedicated pins (192 Kbit/s) on
contra–directional interface.
– The DCCR extracted from RST on channels 3, 4, 5, 6 are mapped inside the the second 6.48 Mbit/s
DCC frame (link 2).
– The DCCR extracted from RST on channels 7, 8, 9 are mapped inside the the third 6.48 Mbit/s DCC
frame (link 3).
RST section
(channels 1) 6.48 Mb/s [link 2]
MUX/DEMUX SC
RFCOH section
(channel 0)
SWITCH
RFCOH section
(channel 1)
ED 03
514
Tab. 56. DCC Mapping & Interleaving
The DCC frame is composed by 101.25 bytes (6.48 Mbit/s), and takes into account the
information from/to four STM–1 channels:
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
CR CR CR CR DR DR DR DR
D1(#1) D1(#2) D1(#3) D1(#4) D2(#1) D2(#2) D2(#3) D2(#4) x
D3(#1) D3(#2) D3(#3) D3(#4) CM CM CM CM x
DM DM DM DM D4 D4 D4 D4 x
D5 D5 D5 D5 D6 D6 D6 D6 x
D7 D7 D7 D7 D8 D8 D8 D8 x
D9 D9 D9 D9 D10 D10 D10 D10 x
D11 D11 D11 D11 D12 D12 D12 D12 x
CF2 CF2 CF2 CF2 DF2 DF2 DF2 DF2 x
F2 F2 F2 F2 CF3 CF3 CF3 CF3 x
DF3 DF3 DF3 DF3 F3 F3 F3 F3 x
x xx x
The information regarding the ATPC functionality can be resumed in the following (for each channel):
– received power (absolute digital value to transmit towards the remote station in order to move the
Tx output power)
– ID_channel + ID_direction (for identification of ATPC channel in order to avoid the repeater bypass
of information and the exactly indication of transmission direction in case of 2+0 (N+0) east–west
configuration)
They can be organized in registers of the CAN_BUS where the PRx and ID_ch information are transmitted
with higher priority than Rx fail.
They can be sent to the remote station by means 64Kb/s channel 1+1 protected. The information for each
channel received in remote station is sent to the relevant transmitter where the PRx information received
is compared to the thresholds set and it is decided to send up or down or hold commands to the RF
transmitter.
The Rx failure received in the Tx remote station is used to switch off the relevant modulator. It will be
switched on after Rx failure removal. Of course the Rx failure alarm is not comprehensive of propagation
alarms.
The ATPC management is performed between two RFCOH sections. That means that in a repeater is
present an ATPC management EAST side and an ATPC management WEST side that work independent
way. The block diagram represented in the following is valid for terminal configuration but can be
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
considered valid also for repeater configuration EAST (or WEST) side if “RRA unit” indication is substituted
with “DROP_INSERT unit” indication.
ED 03
514
RX1 unit RRA1 unit
RX0 unit
MICROPROCESSOR
CAN_BUS
EQUIPMENT SERVICE
CONTROLLER UNIT/ATPC
64 Kb/s
TX1 unit
RFCOH INSERTION
TX0 unit
MOD
On/off
Rx failure
MICROPROCESSOR
CAN BUS
EQUIPMENT SERVICE
CONTROLLER UNIT/ATPC
ED 03
514
5.2.4.4 MC management on RX terminal
RRA 1
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
RRA 0
RFCOH HITLESS SW
DEMUX 0 DEMUX 1
SWITCH
ATL_RFCOH1 ATL_RFCOH0
ED 03
514
5.2.4.5 Sub STM–1 framing processing
In case of multiplexing of an AU–4 via AUG, the position and the justification of AU–4 structure is managed
by octets H1H2H3 type:
H1 Y Y H2 U U H3 H3 H3
U = 11111111
In this sense, we can assume that the only managed transport situation is for an AU–4 structure inside
an STM–1 signal, and the STM–0 design is mapped with 3xVC–3 structures (partially filled with the first
container only) into an AU–4 unit (European standard).
The demultiplexing operation from an STM–1 signal to an STM–0 signal can be provided taking one
column for each three columns group, considering that only the first VC–3 inside the AU–4 structure of
STM–1 frame contains the significant payload.
When the STM–1 standard interface is formed by an STM–0 signal, the AUOH row is mapped according
to the previous description (H1, H2 and H3 are extracted from the STM–0 format), and B2 parity
calculation has to be re–computed with the following criteria:
B2(#2) = Y ⊕ U ⊕ H3
B2(#3) = Y ⊕ U ⊕ H3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
Starting from three TUG–3 units, it is possible to generate the VC–4 structure with the mapping of
3xTUG–3, 18 bytes of fixed justification and the VC–4 POH as described below:
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ VC–4
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ 261 bytes
VC–4 POH
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
FILLED BYTES
ED 03
514
During the multiplexing/demultiplexing of the STM–0 signal for the transmission in the radio section of the
first TUG–3 tributary, it is necessary to consider the following multiplexing structure, provided in SDH
European hierarchy:
STM–1 AUG AU–4 VC–4 TUG–3 TU–3 VC–3 C–3 = 34.368 Kbit/s
X7
So, when we speak of STM–0 signal transmission we intend a non–standard interface, based on a single
TUG–3 container (the first) coming from the mapping of an AU–4 partially equipped.
The 2nd and 3rd TUG–3 are always considered as filled with TU–3’s unequipped container.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
STM–1 multiplexing structure with 3xTUG–3 carrying VC–3 container inside an AU–4 unit
H1 H1 H1
H2 H2 H2
H3 H3 H3
H1 Y Y H2 U U H3 H3 H3
3xVC–3 (interleaved)
H1
H2
H3
H1 H2 H3
1st VC–3
Where:
Y=10010011
U=11111111
NOTE:
– In case of AU–4 pointer = 0 (NDF=0110 and SS_bits=10) the default value for AUOH row is:
AUOH = H1 Y Y H2 U U H3 H3 H3 = 68 93 93 00 FF FF 00 00 00
– In case of 3xVC–3 mapping structure, the TU–3 pointers for the unequipped containers are fixed to:
H1 H2 H3 = 68 00 00 (NDF=0110, SS_bits=10, pointer=0, pointer offset=0)
The STM–0 frame is defined as that frame obtained from the STM–1 one, by reducing its capacity to one
third of it.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The SOH bytes are divided into triplets, and the first byte is taken while the other two discarded.
The Higher Order container is a VC4/3, carried in an AU4/3.
ED 03
514
For hardware convenience it is defined a new entity: AU4/3 carrying a VC4/3, being them structured as
an one third of an AU4.
The AU4/3 mapping carries VC3, VC2, VC12 by two pointer levels (AU_level and TU_level, cascaded);
moreover, fixed stuff columns in their mapping into AU4/3 are in fixed position with respect to the VC4/3
ED 03
514
STM–1 / STM–0 frame processing algorithm:
RPS
RSOH MUX B1 WST & services
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
RPS
B1 handling: RSOH
WST & services MUX the byte is recovered from insertion
the SDH frame after
extraction on descrambling and is and B1
STM–1 frame compared with the calculation
calculation over the
previous elapsed frame
Interleaving of “all 0”
Services bytes for columns
extraction on Nx2 & Nx3
RPS
STM–0 frame Re–writing A1, A2
Re–writing AUOH M1 change position.
(M1 is moved in the original position
[#9.6] and “00” configuration is inserted
in [#9.4] byte)
B2 compensation
B3 compensation
B2 (#1, #3) compensation
RFCOH section RST section
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
5.2.4.6 SOH handling in normal operation condition
SOH handling in normal operation condition according to the default hardware configuration:
MSOH Bypass Bypass All the MSOH bytes are in a fixed bypass
condition without any possibility to be
managed.
This operation is involved in Radio Section Termination area (RST) as in the following block diagram:
RRA RADIO
ED 03
514
5.2.4.7 Alarms detected in RST section
TIM: when J0 byte, extracted from SDH stream received, is different from the data written in
J0_register by micro–processor interface (according to the regenerator section trace
algorithm), Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) alarm is detected and the AIS condition is
activated.
MS–RDI: the Multiplex Section Remote Defect Indication is used to return an indication to the
transmit end that the received end has detected an incoming section defect or is receiving
MS–AIS.
MS–RDI is generated by inserting a “110” code in positions 6, 7 and 8 of the K2 byte before
scrambling.
MS–AIS: the Multiplex Section AIS indication detect an incoming AIS signal.
MS–AIS is generated by inserting a “111” code in positions 6, 7 and 8 of the K2 byte before
scrambling.
N.B. the Out of Frame Second (OFS) is declared when the STM–1 frame alignment process is in the
OOF state.
This parameter is used as additional performance parameter.
The proprietary management of K0 channel (Radio Channel Identification) inside the RFCOH section is
the same of J0 in RST section. The detected alarm is the following:
ED 03
514
In the following diagram is indicated the functional representation of the system with the alarms indication
as reported to ECT/OS:
TX_LOS
LINE–SIDE RADIO–SIDE
ED 03
514
In the following diagram is indicated the functional representation of the system with the primitives for the
performance monitoring as reported to ECT/OS.
OOF
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
TL
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
EB (B1)
document, use and communication of its contents
LINE–SIDE RADIO–SIDE
PSA RL
EB (B1) PSR OOF FEC
Legend:
TL: Transmitted level, is the level of the estimated transmitter power at the transmitter output.
The parameter is represented by two values:
– an integer fixed value expressed in [dBm] defining the transmitted power value;
– an integer offset value expressed in [dB] representing the variation with respect to the
nominal value.
RL: Received level, is the level of the estimated received power at the input of the receiver. In 2°
release both value will be reported. The parameter unit shall be expressed in [dBm] and
represented by the rounded nearest integer.
PSA: Protection Switch Actual, represents any actual switch from a protected (working) channel to
a protecting (stand–by) channel
PSR: Protection Switch Request, represents any activation of a switch initiation criteria which may
lead to automatic switches from a working channel to a stand–by channel and viceversa.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
5.2.4.8 Regenerator Section trace management
J0 expected K0 expected
J0 transmitted J0 expected
(radio side) (radio side)
NOTES:
J0 is represented by an integer of 15 digits (multiframe mode9 or one byte (insert character mode).
The default value for J0 is “0000 0001” (unspecified Regenerator Section Trace).
The methodology of J0 management is described in the following para.5.2.4.8.1 on page 269.
ED 03
514
5.2.4.8.1 J0 management
The J0 byte located at # (1, 7) byte in an STM–1 is allocated to a Regenerator Section Trace. This byte
is used to transmit repetitively a Section Access Point Identifier so that a section receiver can verify its
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
continued connection to the intended transmitter. Within a national network, or within the domain of a
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
single operator, this Section Access Point Identifier may use either a single byte (containing the code
0–255) or the Access Point Identifier format as defined in clause 3/G.831. At international boundaries, or
at the boundaries between the networks of different operators, the format defined in clause 3/G.831 shall
be used unless otherwise mutually agreed by the operators providing the transport.
A 16–byte frame is defined for the transmission of Section Access Point Identifiers where these conform
to the definition contained in clause 3/G.831. The first byte of the string is a frame start marker and includes
the result of a CRC–7 calculation over the previous frame. The following 15 bytes are used for the transport
of 15 T.50 characters (international Reference Version) required for the Section Access Point Identifier.
The 16–byte frame description is given in Table 4/G.707 reported herebelow:
TABLE 4/G.707
16–byte frame for Trail APId
1 1 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
2 0 X X X X X X X
3 0 X X X X X X X
: : :
16 0 X X X X X X X
NOTES
1 C1C2C3C4C5C6C7 is the result of the CRC–7 calculation over the
previous frame. C1is the MSB.
2 0XXXXXXX represents a T.50 character.
In the case of interworking of equipment implementing the STM identifier functionality (see N.B.) and
equipment employing the Regenerator Section Trace function, the latter shall interpret the pattern
”0000001” in J0 as ”Regenerator Section Trace – unspecified”. This unspecified Regenerator Section
Trace can also be used if no use of the Regenerator Section Trace is made.
ED 03
514
5.2.4.8.2 Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) detector
The Trail Trace Identifier is a 16_BYTE or 1_BYTE string used in SDH to detect mis–connections inside
a communication network. A receiver has to validate the received string, in order to be sure that it has not
In the following, the algorithm to detect the TIM condition is described: this algorithm is applied at all SDH
layers in which Trail Trace Identifier feature is defined, so it is suitable for processing byte J0 (section trace)
and bytes J1, J2 (VCi path trace).
DATA
16_BYTE
t, f, d
t, f, d TIM 1/16
COMB TIM1/16 machine alarm
t, f, d
1/16
1_BYTE TIM
valid CRC–7
t = true TIMX
f = false TIMX machine alarm
valid CONST
d = dontcare
Incoming data are at the same time checked in order to find the standard 16_BYTE string with multiframe
alignment word and CRC–7, or a fixed 16 times repeating 1_BYTE string. The preset 16/1 is needed to
tell the system if a 16_BYTE or a 1_BYTE string is expected. After validation process (correct CRC–7 and
multiframe for the 16_BYTE string, same value 16 times for the 1_BYTE string), the received string is
compared with the expected one. If the preset 16/1 is set to ”16”, the comparison with 1 is always false;
if the preset 16/1 is set to ”1”, the comparison with 16 is always false.
Each output (that can assume three possible values: ”false”, ”true”, ”dontcare” if the received string has
not been validated) of the two comparisons is sent, through a COMB function, to a state machine (the
TIM1/16 machine) with four states: alarm, not alarm, and two intermediate states. ”False” causes the state
machine moving towards the alarm state, ”true” causes the state machine moving towards the not alarm
state, ”dontcare” leaves the machine in the state it is.
In parallel, further control is performed by the TIMX machine, in such a way that if for 8x16 times neither
a fixed string nor a correct multiframe alignment word plus CRC–7 can be found, the TIM alarm is anyway
declared (this feature is not required by standards at now).
The TIM algorithm described is fully compliant with the standard promptness requests about maximum
detection time and is able to detect all possible cross–misconnections:
– expected 1_BYTE string, with a different 1_BYTE or a 16_BYTE string received;
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
Here below, TIM algorithm is described in more details:
a) 16_BYTE DETECTOR
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
As it can be seen in the following Fig. 139. , the 16_BYTE detector internally consists of four
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
functions:
• a multiframe aligner in order to synchronize the machine itself to the 16_BYTE frame;
• a CRC–7 extractor, in order to calculate the CRC–7 from the received frame;
• a mismatch detector, in order to determine whether a received 16_BYTE frame is different from
the expected string;
• a command generator, which drives the TIM1/16 machine, depending on the outputs of the
preceding two functions.
valid CRC–7
CRC–7 detector
8
1 sync t, f, d
DATA Multiframe Aligner Command Generator
match
Mismatch detector
8
DATA EXP 1/16
b) 1_BYTE DETECTOR
8 valid const
DATA 16 byte integrator
sync t, f, d
MOD 16 counter Command Generator
match
Mismatch detector
8
DATA EXP 1/16
5.2.4.8.3 K0 management
The K0 bits were defined in RFCOH section to perform a “proprietary” regenerator section trace internally
to the switching section.
K0 is represented by 6 bits (inside a RFCOH byte).
K0_mismatch alarm is detected after 3 consecutive frame of erroneous K0 received, and it is used as
channel switching criteria.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
5.2.4.9 N+1 Repeater configuration
0, 1 channels
2, 3, 4, .... channels
DEMODULATOR ALIGNER DROP / INSERT MODULATOR
RFCOH management:
E1, F1, K0, DCCR, ATPC, DSI, MC,
CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, CH5
NxWST management
ED 03
514
5.2.4.10 MC management on Repeater configuration
DROP 1 W–E
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
DROP 0 W–E
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
OR operation on local
EWL and EWH alarms
SWITCH SPLIT
DEM 0
DEM 1
DEM 9
ED 03
514
5.2.5 Remote Inventory subsystem
The available information, written in a 64x16 bit EEPROM on board (RI device), is: construction date, code
number, maker name, Card–type, etc. (see details in the Operator Handbook).
The relevant data are transported by the CAN bus and are managed by the System Controller unit, which,
besides the information retrieved from the units’ RI device, add the slot identifier (ID) information.
The System Controller unit can also manage the visual indications of the board (LEDs) and some I/O
parallel commands/contacts/alarms that can eventually be transferred by means of the CAN bus.
The agent microcontroller on each unit manages the Remote Inventory, with the exception of Power
Supply Units (PSU) and Battery Filter units (PSF), that are supported by ESC Agent.
The Remote Inventory of unit’s submodules (CANC–COMB modules, Additional TPH–DEV and Optical
interface) are supported by the respective Agent Unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
CAN 0 BB
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
WEST HK DRIVER
Add. Add.
IfTPH
unit IfTPH
unit additional
TPH–DEV
MD0 MD1 MD2 MD3 MD4 MD5 MD6 MD7 MD8 MD9
If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit
CANC–COMB
MODULES
CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9
Optical Optical Optical Optical Optical Optical Optical Optical Optical Optical OPTICAL
If unit If unit If unit If unit If unit If unit If unit If unit If unit If unit
interface interface interface interface interface interface interface interface interface interface
MODULES HC12
ESC
Agent
N.12 Enable
PSU0 PSU1 PSU2 PSU3 PSU4 PSU5 PSU6 PSU7 PSU8 PSU9 ESC
Unit
Battery filter 1
Battery filter 2
CAN 0 BB
Enable
Remoty inventory Clock
Bus Data input EEPROM
Data output
+3.3V
gnd
Missing
N.B. SERVICE WEST and HST DRIVER not present in current release
ED 03
514
5.2.6 System Controller unit description
Refer to para.3.6.2 on page 140 for the unit physical views and operative information.
The block diagram of Fig. 142. is relevant to the whole unit (mother board and the subunit ESCON).
– Equipment controller
– Radio controller
– DCCR management
– Remote Inventory management
– Station alarms management
– Summarizing alarms management
– Housekeeping alarms management
On the board there is an 8–bits microcontroller, to convert the bus SPI of ESCON into CAN 0 BB–BUS,
Can 1 BB–Bus and CanRT bus.
The functions of Equipment Controller and Radio controller are described in para.5.2.2 on page 237.
The functions for the Remote Inventory management are described in para.5.2.5 on page 274.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
N.B.
03
Resistive
Load
955.203.292 Q
RTX0 RTX2RTX2
RTX1RTX1 RTX3RTX3
RTX4RTX4
RTX5RTX5
RTX6RTX6
RTX7RTX7
RTX8RTX8
RTX9RTX9
CAN 0 BB
and
Resistive Resistive CAN0 BB RC local debug
Load Load
ocal
F
MPC860 MPC860
ISS
EN B EN QB3 (10base 2)
MD0MD1MD1
MD2MD2MD3 MD3 MD7 MD7MD8MD8MD9MD9
MD4MD4MD5MD5MD6MD6 QB3 (10base T
and Debug_N
RC or EC debug local)
EC
Resistive Resistive SPI
Load Load Local
bus
CAN0 BB FPGA
FPGA
Can 0 Can 1
CH0CH1 CH1CH2 CH2CH3CH3 CH4CH4 CH5CH5CH6CH6CH7CH7 CH8CH8CH9CH9 EXP.
Control. Control. P I O/HK
ALARM
UART
514
SERVICE Extension HST
CAN 1 Download FPGA and RT Power
3DB 02839 AA AA
SERVICE SPRI Supply Alarms
WEST HKHK DRIVER
CAN RT
HC12 Router
Remote
SPI Inventory BB
CAN0 BB
Power Supply
and
Battery filter
277 / 514
DCCR Management
An EPLD performs three bi–directional links in order to insert/extract the DCCR line side of the all RRA
units, and DCCR radio side from/to Service unit:
Summarizing/Housekeeping Alarms
The ESCON subunit manages 9 Input and 14 Output signal alarms. By means of the alarms expansion
circuit located on ESC mother board, there are 22 Input and 56 Output signals available.
In 9600LSY application the following number of alarms are managed:
– 22 HK input
– 10 HK output
– 46 output alarms
In order to reduce the power consumption, all relays are switched off in normal conditions; the presence
of active alarms corresponds always to closed contact with a common wire available to the Customer.
The electrical characteristics of relays are: (V is voltage between the warm wire and the common one).
ED 03
514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
374
03
138
158 HK1
4 HK2
HK 1–4 Lamp OUT 11 0 0 8 OE HK3 ANDOR
HK4
4 4 alarms OUT 12 } 1SEL 1 A GA3
HK 13–16 SEL IN 1–4 OUT 13 2 2 GA4
CK GA5
3 GA6
Vcc 4 Rack lamps
158 5 INT to M184
4 OUT 14 E 6
374 GA7
HK 5–8 N GA8 connector of
4 4 7 OE GA9
HK 17–20 SEL 8 GA10
TUP M184
Accesstoarea
955.203.292 Q
IN 6–8 B GA11
8 GA12
CK GA13 (BB shelf)
GA14
158 ESCONX
GA 9–12 OUT 1 GA1 FREE
GA 21,22 4 374 GA15
OUT 2 GA2 TUP
SEL GA16
IN 9–12 8 OE GA17
ORALIM GA18
C GA19
GA20
PWANDOR CK GA21
GA22
From Battery
DCCR TO/FROM RFCOH ( Service) Filter 1 and 2
374 Alarms battery
GA23
Link 1
Stuffing SPI GA24
Link 1
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRASTBY0 ) 8 OE GA25
el.store GA26
D GA27
GA28
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA1) DCCR mapping 6.48 CK GA29 Service Battery
GA30
DCCR TO/FROM
DCCR extracting
RST (RRA2 DCCR extracting Mbit FPGA
374 HK5
HK6
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA 3) 8 OE HK7
Stuffing HK8
Stuffing E HK9
Can 0 Can 1 HK10
Link 2
el.store
Link 2
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA4 ) el.store CK GA31
Control. Control. GA32
DCCR mappingDCCR mapping
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA5)
DCCR extractingDCCR extracting 374 GA33
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA6 GA34
8 OE GA35
Can 0 Can 1 GA36
GA37
F GA38
Link 3
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA 7) Stuffing GA39
CK
Link 3
Stuffing GA40
el.store
el.store
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA8 )
DCCR mappingDCCR mapping
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA9)
DCCR extractingDCCR extracting 374 GA41
514
GA42
3DB 02839 AA AA
8 OE GA43
Ck + SY from GA44
main channel G GA45
Sy
from GA46
CK GA47
main channel GA48
Ck + SY from CK 38.88 + SY
RRA 0,1,2,8,9 MUXMUX LogicLogic
Ck + Sy
from
Ck + SY from EPLD EPLD
279 / 514
5.2.7 Flash Card description
Refer to para.3.6.2 on page 140 for the unit physical views and operative information.
1) the whole Equipment software programs (susceptible to be downloaded toward the Supervisory
Units);
2) the system configuration data. This configuration data set is named MIB and can be saved as
a file in the Craft Terminal (or OS) environment, as well as can be restored in the Flash Card
retrieving this file from the Craft Terminal (or OS);
3) the routing configuration data (N.B.):
– Local Configuration
– OS Configuration
– NTP Server Configuration
– LAPD Configuration
– Ethernet Configuration
– RAP Configuration
– MESA Configuration.
This configuration data set cannot be saved together with MIB data.
The presence of the FLASH CARD as individual part simplifies the maintenance procedure in case
of failure of the System Controller, as explained in para.7.7.4.4 on page 384 and para.7.7.4.5 on page
384.
N.B. This list is merely for general information only. Refer to the C.T. Operator’s Handbook for a more
precise list.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
5.2.8 Additional Housekeeping unit description
Refer to para.3.6.8 on page 154 for the unit physical views and operative information.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
By its use, other 18 HK Inputs become available, besides those already available with the System
Controller unit.
(M1) is the connector for getting the 18 HK Inputs (for pinout see point a ) on page 154).
The connector (M2) is connected by cable to connector (M179) of Baseband shelf (see Fig. 95. on page
178). By this cable the unit:
A red led on the front indicates the failure of Additional Housekeeping unit
18 Housekeeping
Inputs
M1 CEPT
INTERFACE
SUB–D 25 pins
female
3.45 V
Remote HC12
5.3 V Inventory mP
M2 HK–DEV Card Fail
led
SUB–D 9 pins
male HK–DEV Card Missing
Can 0 BB
ED 03
514
5.3 Power supply subsystem
The Power Supply subsystem distributes both batteries BATT.A and BATT.B voltages to each user circuit
in the following way:
b) Power Supply distribution in the Transceiver shelf (see Fig. 145. herebelow and Fig. 97. on
page 181).
Power supply cables from TRU are connected to following connectors:
• (M2) for BATT.A and (M3) for BATT.B, by means of which transceivers TR0 to TR4 receive
power through the shelf backpanel
• (M5) for BATT.A and (M6) for BATT.B, by means of which transceivers TR5 to TR9 receive
power through the shelf backpanel
BATT. A
BATT. B
TR0 TR9
…...
FAN SUBRACKS
Fig. 145. Power Supply distribution from Top Rack Unit and Transceiver shelf Power Supply
distribution
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
c) Power Supply distribution in the Baseband shelf
Power supply cables from TRU (see Fig. 145. on page 282) are connected to following connectors:
• BATT.A cable connected to Power Supply Input connector of PSF1 unit equipped in slot 25 (i.e.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
• BATT.B cable connected to Power Supply Input connector of PSF2 unit equipped in slot 36 (i.e.
on the right) of Baseband shelf
N.B. PSF unit front view is depicted in Fig. 76. on page 153
PSF1 and PSF2 position in the shelf is shown in Fig. 64. on page 135
The distribution of Power supply from PSF units to the subrack is depicted in Fig. 146. herebelow:
each PSF unit receives also the power supply voltage from the other PSF; after filtering:
• BATT.A and BATT.B primary voltages are distributed through the backpanel toward the Power
Supply units PSU0 .... PSU9 (slots (E) in Fig. 64. on page 135)
• converted voltages are distributed through the backpanel to units SERVICE and SYSTEM
CONTROLLER in the shelf (respectively in slot (A) and (B) in Fig. 64. on page 135), and,
through its cable, to ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING unit (see para.3.6.8 on page 154)
The distribution of Power supply from PSU units to the units MODEM and RRA/RRAS is depicted
in Fig. 146. herebelow:
PSU units are grouped in 2–units groups (i.e. PSU0+PSU1 , PSU2+PSU3 , ..). Each PSU pair
converts and then distributes, through the backpanel, power supply to the correspondent pair of RRA
and MODEM.
AL0
+5,3V
Power MODEM 0
Supply 0 +3,45V +5,3Vp
+3,45Vp RRA 0 or
RRASTBY
AL1
+5,3V RRA1
Power +3,45V +5,3Vp
Supply 1
+3,45Vp
MODEM 1
–Battery 2
AL8
–Battery 1
+5,3V
Power MODEM 8
Supply 8 +3,45V +5,3Vp
Filter1 +3,45Vp
RRA 8
BATT. 1 DC/DC AL9
Bat 2
ALf2
+3,45Vp
BATT. 2 DC/DC
+5,3Vp
Filter2
SERVICE
Additional
Housekeeping
SYSTEM
SERVICE BATTERY CONTROLLER
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
d) Service Battery to System Controller unit
In addition to the voltage distributed by PSF1 and PSF2 units, the System Controller unit receives
also the battery voltage by means of the cable used for Station Alarms management (see Tab. 37. on
The Additional Housekeeping unit is powered as the System Controller unit (of which it must be
considered an extension), as depicted in Fig. 146. on page 283. From the physical point of view,
power supply is lead on the cable connecting the Additional Housekeeping unit to the BB shelf (see
Tab. 40. on page 192).
Power supply cables from TRU (see Fig. 145. on page 282) are connected to following connectors
of Fans shelf (see Fig. 93. on page 172):
• (M1) for BATT.A
• (M4) for BATT.B
As depicted in Fig. 163. on page 312, both BATT.A and BATT.B voltages are distributed to both FANS
ASSEMBLED units.
Inside each FANS ASSEMBLED unit, as depicted in Fig. 164. on page 313, there are two power
supply units (one receiving BATT.A power supply voltage, the other receiving BATT.B power supply
voltage) from which, diode–decoupled, power supply is distributed to the four fans of the assembly.
Please make reference to 1650SM–C specific documentation (see para.18.2.2.2 on page 471).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
Select by ECT
HDB3 unprotected 1x2Mb/s from Access Area
FPGA NRZ Protected 1x2Mb/s from Service
03
9 9
1
1 RRA 9
STM1 MOD IF to TR
955.203.292 Q
and message exchange.
5.1 Mb
F Protected second WST
QB3 SC Protected use with Modem/ RRA
DCCR 1x2Mb/s
PIO in future release
Switch logic EOW
SERVICE 64 Kb
N+1
5.4.1 Interconnection general block diagrams
DCCR DSI,MC,ATPC
5.1 Mb
5.1 Mb
0
0
STM1
MOD IF 0 to TR0
514
O/E RST MUX RFCOH
3DB 02839 AA AA
RRA Stby
285 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
Select by HDB3 unprotected 1x2Mb/sto Access Area
03
ECT FPGA
NRZ Protected 1x2Mb/s to Service
9
9
1
RRA
955.203.292 Q
IF from TR DEM STM1
RFCOH APSE RST O/E
5.1 Mb
0
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
RRA Stby
286 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
5.4.2 RRA–CHANNEL “STM1+1WST” and “STM0+0WST” description
Refer to para.3.6.4 on page 147 for the unit physical views and operative information.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
On the RRA–CHANNEL unit it is possible to insert the optical interface module (refer to para.5.4.4 on page
292 for its description).
RRA–CHANNEL description
Delay cells, placed in TX sides, compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths of the two
signals.
The delay can be set with one bit step in the range 0 to 256 bits.
Delay cells, placed in RX side, compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths of the two
signals. The static delay equalization is obtained by means an automatic procedure to facilitate the
approach during field installation.
At RX side, whenever both paths are aligned, the phase comparator generates an OK command,
indicating that a switching operation can be performed.
The Switch command comes from the logic switch placed on the service board.
Inside the ASIC, the loopback connections are present, as described in the Equipment Control Subsystem
description (see para.5.2.1.2.2 on page 226).
The alarms, commands, and every other information regarding the communication with System controller
are organized in the registers of SPI and converted by Microcontroller in Can 0 BB–Bus.
ED 03
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
To
03
RFCOH
DCCR RSOH RRASTBY
38.800 Vcxo A
Equalizer Mhz
Electrical
STM1 CMI/NRZ TCXO vcxo
SEL
LOS
955.203.292 Q
input Switch Optical To modem
Signal input
ASIC To modem
. RFCOH
NRZ+CK RSTRST RFCOH NRZ
MUXMUX Delay
256 bits
0–256 TX
RXRX TX
TX TX Loopback
only local
Loopback
2 * 2Mbit WST
2 * 2Mbit WST only local
Optical Optical loopback loopback
G.A “CERBERO”
STM1 ElasticElastic
memmemDelay
. Delay NRZ
Interface . 32bit 32bit 256
NRZ
RST 0–0–256 RFCOH RFCOH
NRZ+CK RST CK
CK
Elastic Elastic
mem mem .
DEMUX RX From Modem
DEMUX
A.L.S TX RX 32bit 32bit From Modem
TX RX
PhasePhase 38.88 Mhz
38.88 Mhz
delay
comparcompar
delay
Missing vcxo
TCXO WST1 FAIL
vcxo
SEL 155.520 Ok LOS_ R
TX fail /degrade Switch
Mhz Pat 38.88 Mhz
RFCOH
(only optical)version RSOH Ok Bit
DCCR Kofin NRZ 2Mbit WST
KRn From protected.
RRASTBY KAIS From/to Service
1–2
RRA MISSING
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
68HC012 Parallel Parallel wire alarms
Serial Fast alarms RRA ALARMS RRA ALARMS
can
HDB3 1 * 2Mbit WST
Can 1BB Can 0BB unprotected.
288 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
5.4.3 RRA–STANDBY “STM1+1WST” and “STM0+0WST” description
Refer to para.3.6.5 on page 149 for the unit physical views and operative information.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
On the RRA–CHANNEL unit it is possible to insert the optical interface module (refer to para.5.4.4 on page
292 for its description).
RRA–STBY description
An electrical CMI /NRZ conversion is performed with LOS input alarm generation. In the receive section
the complementary operations are performed.
Delay cells, placed in TX sides, compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths of the two
signals.
The delay can be set with one bit step in the range 0 to 256 bits.
Delay cells, placed in RX side, compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths of the two
signals. The static delay equalization is obtained by means an automatic procedure to facilitate the
approach during field installation.
ED 03
514
At RX side the unit receives a 155 Mbit stream from RFCOH section (this signal comes from standby
demodulator) and sends it by splitter to the respective RRA1/RRA9 unit.
Inside the RRASTBY there are the loopback connections, as described in the Equipment controller sub
The alarms, commands, and every other information regarding the communication with System controller
are organized in the registers of SPI and converted by Microcontroller in Can 0 BB–Bus.
ED 03
514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
From RRA1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9
LOS_RIFn
DCCR RSOH KOP
03
FPGA
38.800
Equalizer
Mhz
Electrical Delay
Delay Vcxo
TCXO 256
0–
0–256
STM1 CMI/NRZ SEL A
LOS Switch
input
955.203.292 Q
Optical RST To modem
. RFCOH
Signal I/O NRZ+CK MUX NRZ
TX
RX TX
Loopback
1 * 2Mbit WST only local
Optical loopback ASIC
Optical Elasticmem Delay NRZ
STM1 NRZ+CK 32bit 0–256 RFCOH
. Elasticmem.
RST CK
32bit
Interface DEMUX RX From modem
Phase
A.L.S TX RX compar delay
vcxo
Missing TCXO 38.88 vcxo
Mhz 38.88
SEL Mhz LOS_ R
155.520
TX fail/degrade Mhz
(only optical version) RFCOH
RSOH RRA CARD fail
Switch
Red led
NRZ 2Mbit WST
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
RRA
To RRA1………..RRA9
MISSING
68HC012 Serial Fast alarmsSerial Fast alarms RRASTBY 1 * 2Mbit WST
ALARMS NRZ/HDB3 unprotected.
can SeeTable
RRASTBY
DATA ALARMS
Parallel wire alarms RRASTBY
Can 1BB Can 0 BB ALARMS
Serial BusTo Service FPGA Parallel alarms from Modem HDB3 1 * 2Mbit WST
unprotected.
291 / 514
5.4.4 STM–1 optical module description
See Fig. 71. on page 148 (physical view) and Fig. 151. on page 292 (block diagram).
Each module contains two optical components (Tx and Rx), two level adapters, the remote inventory and
the ALS–restart push–button.
The RX optical component converts the 155.52 Mb/s STM1 optical signal into electrical, recoveries the
clock, detects the LOS alarm.
The TX optical component converts the electrical signal (data & clock) into optical, detects the
Laser–failure and Laser–degrade alarms. Receives the Laser–shutdown command from the controller
and the ALS–restart command from a front push–button.
OPTICAL EDR
INPUT DATA RX
Rx Opt. Module Level
ECKR Adapter CLOCK RX
LOS
EDT DATA TX
ECT Level
OPTICAL Adapter CLOCK TX
OUTPUT Tx Opt. Module
Laser Fail
Laser deg.
Laser
Shutdown
ALS–Restart o
o
Remote TO CAN BUS
GND Inventory Rinv
OPTICAL MODULE
ED 03
514
5.4.5 128QAM MODEM “STM1– 1WST” and “STM0– 0WST” description
Refer to para.3.6.6 on page 150 for the unit physical views and operative information.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
The second and third IF input are associated to optional baby boards.
One red led is also present to indicate the MODEM card fail.
Modem description
In a single ASIC the following parts are implemented: MLC code and decoder, Mapping 128 QAM, Digital
filter, BSE, FSE, XPIC and Base Band combiner.
The main functions are described in the following, according to MODEM block diagram (see Fig. 152. on
page 296):
– I/O
The input/output interface, composed by NRZ signal and CK signal, is internal interface. The signals
come from/to RRA unit / RRA STBY or DROP in repeater configuration, no external access is
available.
The input/output signal is converted in four parallel streams; because of different transmission
capacities planned, the streams have, accordingly, different rates.
To reduce the effects of burst errors due to the convolutional code, a suitable interleaving technique
has been implemented. The structure of the interleaving is based on the introduction of distinct delay
chains on the parallel signal stream.
The two signals, the “in phase” channel and the “quadrature” channel, after MLC code QAM mapping
they are sent at 1/T frequency to a 36 taps digital shaping filter. The two filtered signals come out from
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
– BB/IF Side modulation
Two IF (140 MHz) in–quadrature carriers are modulated by the two filtered signals by means of two
balanced mixers. Then, modulated carriers are summed in order to generate a 128 QAM
CROSS–modulated signal.
– Clock recovery
A Gardner synchronizer that controls a VCXO, which provides a sampling signal at 2/T frequency,
performs clock recovery.
Gardner algorithm is implemented in ASIC “Modem”
The delay’s
adjustment is
Self acting by
1IF Maim ECT
Delay 1
2IF diversity
Delay 2
3 IF cross Main
0 Delay 3
Every IF can be delayed a maximum 7x Ts/2 at Ts/2 step , compensate the static delays resulting
from the different paths of the two signals diversity.
An automatic procedure by ECT set the difference of the delays respective First and Second IF.
There is not automatic procedure for delay of the third IF.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
– Equalizer (FSE/DFE)
Into ASIC are implemented a synchronous equalizer (BSE – Baud Spaced Equalizer), and a
Fractionally Spaced Equalizer (FSE).
FSE consists of a dual structure FIR filter and two mixers. Filtering section is 4D structured, (i.e. it
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
– XPIC
When the frequency reuse is requested the XPIC cancellers the cross–polar interference.
On each way in dual polarization the IF signal is base–band converted, filtered and sampled by A/D
converters at 2/T frequency. Samples taken at t=KT are distinguished from those taken at
t=(KT+T/2) by XPIC S/P converters by means of 1/T frequency clock signal.
XPIC is adapted by means of error signals coming from equalizer and its central coefficient is left
spare for phase errors recovering.
XPIC output signal is sent to equalizer way adder.
XPIC way ASIC receives algorithm switch control signal and deep fading reset signal from equalizer
way ASIC.
ED 03
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
VCXO A Electronic +5.3
03
fuses +3.45 v
Los_M
955.203.292 Q
90 IF out
+
Mod
Mir Pseudo Pseudo FIR QFIR Q D/A
Squelch Main random random
DELAY
DELAY
DROPDROP 140Mhz
A/D XO
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
Baby boards spi ALARMS, SQUELCH
90 90 alarms CONTROL
Third IF + ASIC 68HC12
A/DA/D can
3 Squelch
Card fail,missing Can 0BB
Third IF loss
and
Remote Inventory
296 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
5.4.6 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit description
Refer to para.3.6.3 on page 144 for the unit physical views and operative information.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
N.B. The RFCOH bytes and 2 x 2Mbit/s WST can be protected only on the two channels selected
by ECT from the couples shown in the following table:
Tab. 57. Channels protectable for RFCOH bytes and 2 x 2Mbit/s WST
On the front of the board are provided the following connectors and led:
ED 03
514
5.4.6.1 Service Channels
– One (omnibus channels on E1 byte), one telephone jack and three analog party lines
– 3 x 64 kbit/s V11 or 2 x 64 kbit/s and 1 x128 kbit/s , V11 (Sw configurable for connection to 1 or 2
bytes)
– 3 x 64 kbit/s G703
The service unit manages a TPH byte only to/from the RFCOH byte protected in 1+1 or to/from external
connection.
The desk telephone TPH, by HD selection, can be sent either into RFCOH byte or toward ADM in format
G703 (see block diagram).
E1, F1, D1–D3 bytes are always accessible both at radio and line side, while a maximum of 5 bytes line
and radio side may be accessed chosen between the remaining RSOH bytes.
At radio side, the service channels (comprehensive of DCCR, monitoring channels, ATPC, DSI bytes) are
dropped/inserted in 1+1 protected mode (splitted at Tx side and switched at RX side).
The Tx service alarm (ATL RFCOH) is remotized by means of monitoring channel (with 1+1 protection)
to be used with ATL and HBER remote alarms as minor switching criteria, while demodulator alarm and
HBER alarm are considered major switching criteria.
– to address to service the line–side user interfaces RSOH bytes from different RRA and/or RFCOH
bytes (7 bytes) on RRA used for 1+1 protection;
The alarms, commands, and every other information regarding the communication with System controller
are organized in the registers of SPI and converted by Microcontroller in Can 0 BB–Bus.
For the detailed description of RSOH, RFCOH and DCCR management, please make reference to
para.5.2.4 on page 245 (Signal Management).
The FPGA, after HDB3/NRZ conversion, splits the 2Mbit/s asynchronous digital stream.
The two channels (N.B.) are inserted/extracted to/from a selected couple of RRA units among the those
specified in Tab. 57. on page 297. To minimize the errors during the switching operation a “make before
break“ switch is adopted and particular care is taken in switching logic.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
N.B. In first release, only one channel can be used (see Fig. 69. on page 145).
ED 03
514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
Open on 1st SERVICE
unit in 4+0/4+1 DCCR Dip switch
E/W configuration 192kbit SERVICE CARD fail
Line side
Lineside K
FPGA K M RFCOH–RX/TX # 0
955.203.292 Q
Rerouting
Rerouting Radio
A Radio side
A side
RR
RR Red led
U RFCOH–RX/TX # 1
X
# 5–9
DEMUXDEMUX // RFCOH–RX/TX # 2
MATRIX
MATRIX RFCOH–RX/TX # 8
MATRIX
MATRIX
D
E RFCOH–RX/TX # 9
MUXMUX M
RFSOH–RX/TX
E1E1
# 0–4
U
FPGA X To /from RRA 0/1/2/8/9
NTONI”
“E Like RFCOH frame
COMBO
DCCR
I/O Radio DSI,ATPC,MC 192kbit SPI service
I/O Line
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
EOW To ADM
RJ11
2x2 Mb/s
1x 9600Kb/s 3 x 64 kb/s 3 x 64 kb/s TPHTPH
Party x Party Lines
3 3xLine 1x 64 Kb/s1x 64 Kb/s
299 / 514
5.4.6.3 Switch Logic N+1
In, N+1 configuration, this function performs the hitless switch, by processing the propagation alarms
coming from demodulators. The Tx and Rx functions, respectively in station A and station B of the link,
– gets the switching controls from the regular and standby channels
– determines the weights of various channels: priorities and simulations
– protects and releases the channels in N+1 configuration, using two service units in 4+1 E/W
configurations (this latter function not used in current release)
– performs the lookout and incoming inhibit
– manages the freezing operations
– manages the manual forcing at the receive side.
DAT A
T MD 1 Missing SYNC
O
CK
RRA 1
E RRA 1 Missing
S Modem 9
Parallel alarms
C MD 9 Missing
DAT A
U
SYNC
N
CK
I RRA 9
T RRA9 Missing
Modem 0
DAT A
SYNCH
CK
RRA Stby
ENTONI
RRAStby Missing
FPGA
RRA n Missing
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
SERVICE
ED 03
514
The following figure shows the input/output of the switch logic:
FPGA
Switch commands
FAST SERIAL BUS
Agent Mod FailJ
Service SW forcing EWj
LBERj
HBERj
DSI 64 kb/s DEMfailj Modem
Modem J =0
J =0–9 –9
to/from EPLD
SWITCH DemCARD fail j
LOGIC Modem missing j
Los Mod j
KRRA Serial/Parallel
RRA fail j
To RRASTBY
KOP RRACARD fail j RRA and RRASTBY
Logic RRAmissing
Output J=0
Los R side Dem j n=1
Korifn LosStbyn
To RRA 1/9 OK pat n
KRPS
Ok bit n
FROM RRAJ
K display RX
ED 03
514
5.5 Transceiver subsystem
The transceiver operates from 4 to 13 GHz. Different P/Ns are envisaged according to the operating
frequency.
Each Radio Transceiver is equipped with the following modules (see Fig. 156. on page 303 for the
transceiver configuration without Rx diversity, and Fig. 157. on page 303 for the transceiver configuration
with Rx diversity):
Fig. 158. on page 304 shows the signals exchanged among Transceiver internal modules.
For maintenance and installation purposes each Radio Transceiver unit must be considered as a unique
block.
A RI (remote inventory) identifies the unit Transceiver, the Local oscillator Tx and the Local oscillator Rx,
via software. RI is housed in the service TX.
ED 03
514
OL TX MON
+VB
GND DC/DC OL TX RF TX
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
RF OUT
–VB CONVERTER
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
RI
RF MON
SERVICE TRX
IF IN
RI µP
OL RX MON
Can–bus
No_missing L.O. – Sync
.
OL RX RF RX RX IN
RI
IF OUT
OL TX MON
+VB
GND DC/DC OL TX RF TX
RF OUT
–VB CONVERTER
RI
RF MON
SERVICE TRX
IF IN
RI µP
OL RX MON
Can–bus
No_ missing
L.O. – Sync
.
OL RX RF RX RX IN
RF RX
RI MAIN
RX IN
RF RX
IF OUT DIV.
IF OUT RF RX
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
–V Battery
IF
ED
+5V
+V Battery adj +7V
+8V
Can–bus
03
4 Bit control for +7V adj
DC/DC
+5V
–12V
RF
PRX Measurement
955.203.292 Q
Squelch
4 Bit Remote inventory
RX
Main
Manual gain control
IF
Manual/Auto RX command
OL+/– command
OL
+15V
Main
–12V
Squelch
Alarm loss loop
MON
OL
Alarm low level
3 Bit dati control
OL
Diversity
4 Bit Remote inventory
+5V
TX & SERVICE MODULE
–12V
RF
Measurement
Squelch
4 Bit Remote inventory
RX
Manual gain control
Diversity
Manual/Auto RX command
514
IF
3DB 02839 AA AA
OL+/– command
following voltages: +5V, +8V, +7Vmax (digitally adjustable from 4V to 7V). See Fig. 158.
+8V
OR alarm module
+15V
OL TX
–12V
Alarm loss loop
MON
Alarm low level
MW
DC/DC converter receives primary voltage from the shelf backpanel and supplies to Service module the
RF
MON
304 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
5.5.3 Transmit and Service module
GENERAL
Transmit and Service module here described includes the following hardware components (depicted
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
• RT CONTROL
• AMPLIFIER
• UP CONVERTER
• DELAY LINE
IF input connectors are 75Ω 1.0/2.3 Siemens, microwave output connectors are SMA 50Ω. Coaxial
cable connects Tx output to branching filters. Return loss of TX output is guaranteed by drop–in
isolator.
DC/DC +5V MW
+5V +8V
Power. red Drain fet finale
+8V
PTX meas
.
+7V adj
. Meas
Temp .
4 Bit for 7V
Attenuator
. com
+5V
+3,3V
RXmain OL TX
+5V +5V +8V
–12V –12V +8V +3,3V
OL+/–command +15V +15V
Squelch –12V
Remoteinventory
Manual gain control
µP Alarm loss loop
Alarm low level
Manual/auto 3 bit dati control
Remote. inv
IFblock
In IF
Can bus
RX div . OL RX
+5V
+8V
–12V +3,3V
IF detectorlevel
OL+/– command +15V
OL+/OL– command
Squelch –12V
Remote inventory
Alarm loss loop
Manual gain control Alarm low level
Manual/auto 3 bit dati control
Remote. inv
Squelch
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
RT CONTROL
A microprocessor controls all the functions of Transceiver, besides it holds a Remote Inventory made
with an EPROM. Controlled functions are:
Dati
ED 03
514
• Rx module warning management.
linearization and temperature compensation of field received indication.
Selection of master/slave condition.
Selection of LO+ or LO− condition.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
squelching.
The block diagram of up–conversion and amplification unit is shown in Fig. 160. herebelow.
REVEALED
OUT
xn T RF
LO Vatt
IF MONITORED
1) IF TX
The IF amplifier line accepts signal from 120 to 160 MHz with an input matched to 75 W.
It recovers cable losses (up to 30 m), therefore the incoming signal level can change from –12
dBm to –4 dBm ( standard input level is: –5 dBm).
IF signal is splitted and used to drive the circuits of Power consumption reduction. These circuits
include a delay line to synchronize the envelope resulting command with RF signal on final Fet
drain.
The output IF signal is held constant with an AGC circuit and with a power splitter 2 way 90
is possible to select L.O. condition ( USB or LSB).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
2) UP–CONVERSION
For 11 and 13 GHz frequency band the multiplying factor is x4, obtained with a third MMIC
placed in the same package.
On the same substrate and using the same technologies ,the RF chain is completed with an
active variable attenuator and a power amplifier, both realized in MMIC technology.
This is realized with two discrete transistor (GaAs Mosfets internally matched). Final Fets have
an output power of 4/12 W. At the output, before the drop–in isolator, a double microstrip
directional coupler will provide two signals, one for monitoring and one for AGC detector.
ED 03
514
5.5.4 Receive & IF Rx module
GENERAL
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
RF
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
IN
T xn
Vatt
IF LO
The RF input of the module is connected to the branching by coaxial cable with SMA connectors/50
Ω .The return losses are guaranteed by drop–in isolator. The connectors for IF signals are 75Ω
1.0/2.3 Siemens.
FRONT END
The RF incoming signal is amplified by a first stage ultra low noise HEMT amplifier.
A variable attenuator, driven by the AGC voltage, allows a protection against up fading propagation.
A second stage contains a GaAs MMIC amplifier.
The four outputs are connected with hybrid 90 and 180 to create IF signal ; by properly connecting
hybrid 90 is possible to select LSB or USB.
IF Rx
IF block amplifier contains two attenuators for AGC, controlled from a filtered detector. Then a IF filter
reduces the signal level of adjacent and alternate channels. The IF section supplies alarms for low
field, for RF–Rx failure and a measure of received signal level. Another function controlled by IF
section is the squelch of RX for low fields
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
5.5.5 Local Oscillator module
GENERAL
Master
Lock Power Switch Slave
Alarm Alarm Position
Logic
Ext. VCO Power Detection
Diversity
Output
Switch Position
Lock Detect
X2 Splitter
VCO Switch
Multiplier
Main
Output
VCO External
Output VCO
ED 03
514
TRANSMITTER LO MODULE
The module houses on the same multi layer board the Synthesizer, the Switch and the Multiplier.
It has two RF outputs port, named main and diversity and a monitor VCO output, moreover, for the
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
synchronization in master slave configuration, it makes available its VCO signal and can accept an
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
1) Synthesizer
The synthesizer is a single narrow band loop filter with a BiCMOS technology IC used for PLL
function, a low phase noise VCO and a 2° order active loop filter.
The signal is obtained locking the VCO frequency with a stable frequency reference TCXO.
At the output there’s RFIC in order to achieve a good isolation from external circuits.
The Synthesizer makes available the Lock Detection status.
2) Multiplier
The multiplier is composed by monolithic input buffer, a BJT active X2 multiplier, band–pass
filter, RFIC amplifier and power splitter.
To avoid dangerous emission, the output power is delivered only when the VCO is locked.
The unit makes available the output power detection
External VCO Input Power − 5 dBm ÷ + 5 dBm
3) Master/Slave Configuration
The Transmitter LO Module can run only in Master configuration, at the start up the Switch is
connected at the external VCO and only when its VCO is locked, the Switch must connect the
internal VCO
RECEIVER LO MODULE
1) Synthesizer
As that of Transmitter LO Module
2) Multiplier
As that of Transmitter LO Module
3) Master/Slave Configuration
ED 03
514
5.6 Fans subsystem
The following Fig. 163. shows the block diagram of a fans shelf equipped with two FANS ASSEMBLED
units.
The FANS ASSEMBLED unit includes a microprocessor to manage together with the System Control
subsystem, through the CAN bus:
LED LED
CAN CAN TERMINATION
BATTERY–A
BATTERY–B
ED 03
514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
µP
FAN ALARM
PSU ALARM
CAN
RI
FAN A
FAN B
PSU
BATT. B
BATT. A
LED
PSU
FAN C
FAN D
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
313 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
314 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
6.1 Introduction
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
ED 03
514
6.2 System Characteristics
A’ RF TX
B’ TX
C’ TX D’
TX FILTER BRANCHING FEEDER
A RF RX
B C D
RX RX
RX FILTER BRANCHING FEEDER
ED 03
514
6.2.1 General characteristics
Version INDOOR
Station type Regenerator Terminal – Wireless Multiservice Node (one side or two sides)
Transmission 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x
capacity STM–1 STM–1 STM–1 STM–1 STM–1 STM–1 STM–1 STM–1
(2 x STM–1 with 2x 2x 2x 2x 2x 2x 2x 2x
frequency reuse STM–1 STM–1 STM–1 STM–1 STM–1 STM–1 STM–1 STM–1
with STM–1 only) (with (with (with (with (with (with (with (with
freq. freq. freq. freq. freq. freq. freq. freq.
reuse) reuse) reuse) reuse) reuse) reuse) reuse) reuse)
1x 1x 1x
STM–0 STM–0 STM–0
Service channels – Omnibus voice channel (E1) DTMF (rec. Q23) 600 Ohm – Tx 0 dB,
Rx –4 dB, selective call.
– 3 x 64 Kb/s V11 or 2x 64 Kb/s + 1x 128 Kb/s (SW
configurable–contradirectional)
– 3 x 64 Kb/s G.703 (co–directional)
– 1 x 9.6 Kb/s RS 232
– TMN channel ( D1÷D3 regenerator terminal D4 ÷D12 WMSN )
– voice frequency party line (E1) (Four wire bal. , 600 Ohm, level –3 dB
– 1 voice frequency (point to point only)
– Digital party line for extension 64 Kb/s, G. 703 code
– Output to loudspeaker 400 mW, 4 Ohm
– Telephone set driver for TPH desk 600 Ohm, Tx 0 dB, Rx –4 dB.
table continues
ED 03
514
EQUIPMENT 9640 9647 9662 9667 9674 9681 9611 9613
LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY
8.2÷8.5
7.1÷7.7
3.6÷4.2 4.4÷5.0 5.6÷6.2 (F.386
(F.385
(F.382) (Spain) (OIRT) annex3)
annex3)
t
7.4÷7.9
7.9÷8.4
3.6÷4.2 (F.385
(annex4)
(DTI) annex4)
t
t
7.2÷7.6
3.6÷4.2
(F.385
(F.635)
rec.1) t
3.4÷3.9
(OIRT)
TRANSMITTER
OUTPUT POWER
32,0 32,0 32,0 32,0 32,0 32,0 30,0 28,0
(W ATPC) *
[dBm] (A’)
TRANSMITTER
OUTPUT POWER
30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 28.0 27.0
(W/O ATPC) *
[dBm] (A’)
table continues
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
EQUIPMENT 9640 9647 9662 9667 9674 9681 9611 9613
LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY
1x10–3 BER TH
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
1x10–6 BER TH –72,0 –72,0 –72,0 –72,0 –71,5 –71,5 –71,5 –71,0
(A) (Received typ typ typ typ typ typ typ typ
power) [dBm] –71,0 –71,0 –71,0 –71,0 –70,5 –70,5 –70,5 –70,0
STM–1 gua gua gua gua gua gua gua gua
Background BER
(at nominal Prx 1 x 10E–13
level)
Frequency reuse
YES (STM–1 only)
(XPIC)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
table continues
ED 03
514
EQUIPMENT 9640 9647 9662 9667 9674 9681 9611 9613
LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY
table continues
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
EQUIPMENT 9640 9647 9662 9667 9674 9681 9611 9613
LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
Behavior vs
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
modulated digital
channel
interference:
– co–channel
STM–1 1*10–3
Fig. 175. on page 345
– co–channel
STM–1 1*10–6
– co–channel
STM–0 1*10–3 Fig. 175.
Fig. 175.
N.A. N.A.
– co–channel on page 345
pg.345
STM–0 1*10–6
– adj.channel
STM–1 40 MHz
1*10–3 Fig. 176. Fig. 176.
Fig. 176.
N.A. N.A. N.A.
– adj.channel on page 346
pg.346 pg.346
STM–1 40 MHz
1*10–6
– adj.channel
STM–1 30 MHz
1*10–3 Fig. 177.
Fig. 177.
Fig. 177. on page 347 N.A. N.A.
– adj.channel on page 347
pg.347
STM–1 30 MHz
1*10–6
– adj.channel
STM–0 14 MHz
1*10–3
Fig. 178. on page Fig. 178.
N.A. N.A.
– adj.channel 347 pg.347
STM–0 14 MHz
1*10–6
table continues
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
EQUIPMENT 9640 9647 9662 9667 9674 9681 9611 9613
LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY
C/I for 1 dB
threshold degrad.
@ 10E–6 [dB]:
– co–channel 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33
STM1/STM0
– adjacent ch.
mono lateral –48 –48 N.A. –48 N.A. N.A. –48 N.A.
STM1 40MHz
– adjacent ch.
mono lateral –24 –24 –24 N.A. –24 –24 N.A. –24
STM1 30MHz
– adjacent ch.
mono lateral N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. TBD TBD N.A. TBD
STM0 14 MHz
BER Curve:
Fig. 170.
Fig. 170.
– – STM–0 N.A. N.A.
on page 342
pg.342
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
6.2.2 Power supply characteristics
ED 03
514
6.3 Transceiver characteristics
Tx output range
with ATPC +15 to +15 to +15 to +15 to +15 to +15 to +15 to +15 to
guaranteed. +32 +32 +32 +32 +32 +32 +30 +28
( A’) ( * )
[dBm]
Tx output range
w/o ATPC (1dB
+15 to +15 to +15 to +15 to +15 to +15 to +15 to +15 to
step by SW preset)
+30 +30 +30 +30 +30 +30 +28 +27
guaranteed.
(A’) ( * )
[dB]
NF guaranteed [dB] 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.5 2.8 2.8 3.0 3.5
NF Typical [dB] 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.2 2.5 2.5 2.7 3.2
IF freq. [MHz]
140
Nominal Received
–30
level [dBm]
IF Nominal input /
–5 ± 1 dB
output level [dBm]
table continues
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
EQUIPMENT 9640 9647 9662 9667 9674 9681 9611 9613
LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY
Transmitted
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
spectrum
(Typical) (C’) Fig. TBD
– STM–1
– STM–0
ETSI normatives
Referred for
spectrum mask:
– Referred class
STM–1 ETSI EN 300234, EN 301127, EN 301461
– Referred class
STM–0 ETSI EN 301216
Spectral lines at Compliant with the relevant ETS (EN) specification according to the freq.
symbol rate (dBm) arrangement
Tx and Rx spurious Compliant with the relevant ETS (EN) specification according to the freq.
signals emission arrangement
IF filter selectivity
See Fig. 172. on page 344
STM–1/STM–0
Transceiver power
consumption [W]
– 1+1/2+0 120
– 2+1/3+0 180
– 3+1/4+0 230
– 4+1/5+0 290
– 5+1/6+0 350
– 6+1/7+0 410
– 7+1/8+0 470
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
6.4 Regenerator and Modem characteristics
6.4.1 Modem
Error corrector
MLC 6.5/7 (7.69 % redundancy)
table continues
ED 03
514
EQUIPMENT 9640 9647 9662 9667 9674 9681 9611 9613
LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY
Demodulator
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
band–width $ 0.8
recovery [MHz]
Synchronism
recovery x 0.1
[msec.]
Signature
STM–1:
BER =1*10E–4 Kn gua. = 0.9 ; Kn typ.= 0.4 9 (6.3 nsec.) see also Fig. 179. pg.348
BER =1*10E–6 Kn gua. =1 ; Kn typ.= 0. 55 (6.3 nsec.) see also Fig. 180. pg.349
STM–0 :
BER =1*10E–4 Kn gua. = 1.3 ; Kn typ.= 0.55 (6.3 nsec.) see also Fig. 181. pg.350
BER =1*10E–6 Kn gua. = 1.5 ; Kn typ.= 0.65 (6.3 nsec.) see also Fig. 182. pg.351
Interleave block
120 symbols
length
ED 03
514
6.4.2 XPIC & Combiner (XPIC STM–1 only)
IF Nominal input
–5 (+1 to –6 dB)
[dBm]
IF impedance 75 Ohm
Post demodulation
Butterworth – 9 poles
filter
@ 1x10–3 TBD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
6.4.3 Regenerator
Line Scrambler/
27–1
Desc.
Impedance 75 Ohm
Level 1V pp
– I/O signal
elect. Interf. ITU–T G.703 (Siemens 1.0/2.3 connector)
Code
CMI
– Impedance 75 ohm unbal.
– Signal level 1 Vpp
– Return loss ≤ –15 dB from 8 to 240 MHz
– Input cable ≥ 12.7 dB at 78 MHz as vf
equalizer
Jitter transfer
ITU–T G.958
function
power dBm
table continues
ED 03
514
EQUIPMENT 9640 9647 9662 9667 9674 9681 9611 9613
LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY
Jitter transfer
ITU–T G.958
function
DCCm (D4 to D12) The entire MSOH is not managed and passed–through
– bit rate Kbit/s 576
– interface Not managed by pass condition
AIS management:
– Regenerator
Tx and/or Rx MSAIS (Contains a valid RSOH and an all”1” pattern on MSOH and payload
side in case of LOS,LOF)
– 64 Kbit/s
channels All “1”
Tx/Rx
ATPC channel
64 Kbit/s channel in RFCOH 1+1 protected
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
6.4.4 Power consumption (Regenerator only)
W " 10%
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
1+1/2+0 Hetero 80
ED 03
514
6.5 Branching interfaces
Tx/Rx Antenna
circulator common
x 26
port input return
loss [dB] (C, C’)
6.6 Protections
Radio Protection
Switching (RPS) 1+1/N+1
type
Max. dynamic
recoverable delay ± 10
bits
Regenerator user
Not available
interface protection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
6.7 Environmental characteristics
ETS 300 019 Class 3.1 recommends the following environmental parameters:
a) Sand 30 mg/m3
Overcoming these values could affect Fans Assembled Unit operation. For further information, see
para.7.6.2 on page 374.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
6.7.3 ETS 300019 Class 3.2: partly Temperature controlled locations
Fig. 166. Climatogram for Class 3.2 : Partly temperature controlled locations
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
6.7.4 ETS 300019 Class 3.1: Temperature–controlled locations
This class applies to a permanently temperature controlled closed location. Humidity is usually not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
60
50
45
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
40
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
35
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
30
25
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
20
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
20
10
5
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
0
–5
–10
1.5
1.0
–20
–30
–40
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
85
RELATIVE AIR HUMIDITY %
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
Values outside this field have a probability of oc-
currence of less than 10%(see IEC standard
721–3–0 [2], Class 4)
NOTE: Exceptional conditions may occur following the failure of the temperature controlling system
Heating, cooling, forced ventilation and humidification are used to necessarily maintain the required
conditions – especially where there is a great difference between room environment and external high or
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
low temperatures.
ED 03
514
This class applies to locations:
– where installed equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and to heat radiation. It may also be
exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts in buildings. They are not subjected
– with normal levels of contaminants experienced in urban areas with industrial activities scattered
over the whole area and/or with heavy traffic;
– without special precautions to minimize the presence of sand or dust, but which are not situated in
close proximity to sources of sand or dust;
– normal living or working areas, e.g. living rooms, rooms for general use (theatres, restaurants);
– offices;
– shops;
– telecommunication centers;
ED 03
514
6.7.5 Storage
This class applies to weatherproofed storage having neither temperature nor humidity control. The
location may have openings directly to the open air, i.e., it may be only partly weatherproofed. The
climatogram is shown on Fig. 168. herebelow.
This class applies to storage locations:
– where equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and temporarily to heat radiation: They may also
be exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts, e.g. through doors, windows or
other openings. They may be subjected to dew, dripping water and to icing. They may also be
subjected to limited wind–driven precipitation including snow;
– where mould growth or attacks by animals, except termites, may occur;
– with normal levels of contaminants experienced in urban areas with industrial activities scattered
over the whole area, ad/or with heavy traffic;
– in areas with sources of sand or dust, including urban areas;
– with vibration of low significance and insignificant shock.
Fig. 168. Climatogram for Class 1.2: not temperature controlled storage location
ED 03
514
6.7.6 Transportation
This class applies to transportation where special care has been taken e.g. with respect to low temperature
and handling.
Class 2.2 covers the condition of class 2.1. In addition class 2.2 includes transportation in all types of lorries
and trailers in areas with well–developed road system.
It also includes transportation by ship and by train with specially designed, shock–reducing buffers.
Manual loading and unloading of up to 20 Kg is included.
Extreme low temperature protection during transportation is permitted for equipment in its standard
packing:
ED 03
514
6.8 Optical Safety
This description is relevant only to LHR regenerator system. As far as 1650SM–C equipment,
please refer to the relevant Technical Documentation (para.18.2.2 on page 471)
The Optical Safety characteristics and related precautions to avoid possible exposure to hazardous laser
radiation given herein, are relevant to the optical modules that can be housed on the equipment units with
STM–1 interfaces:
The HAZARD LEVEL classification of the different optical interfaces of LHR system is given in Tab. 58.
on page 339.
The hazard level was assigned in accordance with the requirements of IEC 60825–1 (1993) and IEC
60825–2 (1993).
Output optical interfaces data: the wavelength and the maximum optical power at the output connector
of incorporated laser sources is given in para.6.4.3 on page 329.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
6.8.4 Labelling
The labels reproduced below are affixed during factory settings, except those (explanatory) concerning
the STM–1 ports. In this case the labels are placed in a plastic bag and provided together with the optical
The label is put on the fibre protection cover of all the involved card (see para.6.8.1 on page 339).
The multilanguage label kit, for STM–1 ports, is placed in the same plastic bag provided together with
the module where explanatory labels (in English language), above mentioned, are put.
The multilanguage label kit contains a set of label that reproduce the same (explanatory) above
depicted in the following languages:
• Italian
• Francaise
• Spanish
• German
The customer, to its own discretion, may stick the labels with appropriate language upon the
pre–existing ones or, in case of STM–1 ports, directly on the fibre protection cover of the involved
card (see para.6.8.1 on page 339)
The locations of apertures and fibre connectors are reported on topographical drawings of units front view
and access cards front view:
– in para.3.6.4 on page 147 (RRA–CHANNEL unit)
– in para.3.6.5 on page 149 (RRA–STANDBY unit)
In normal operating conditions, unless intentional manumission, the laser radiation is never accessible.
The laser beam is launched in optical fibre through an appropriate connector that totally shuts up the laser
radiation. Moreover a plastic cover is fitted upon optical connectors by means of screws.
In case of cable fibre break, to minimize exposure times, ALS procedure according to ITU–T G.958 Rec.
is implemented either on STM–1 ports.
ALS timing are not longer than maximum specified in G.958.
The safety instructions for proper assembly, maintenance, and safe use including clear warning
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
concerning precautions to avoid possible exposure to hazardous laser radiation, are reported in para.19.3
on page 484.
ED 03
514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
Fig. 169. 9600 LSY BER curves (STM–1)
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
341 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
Fig. 170. 9600 LSY BER curves (STM–0)
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
342 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
Fig. 171. STM–1 128 QAM typical RF spectrum (measured at point C’)
343 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
Fig. 172. STM–1/STM–0 128 QAM IF RX Filter
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
344 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
TO BE DONE (future edition)
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 175. STM–1 /STM–0 BER 1*10–3 and 1*10–6 threshold degradation for co–channel interference
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
interference
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
Fig. 176. STM–1 BER 1*10–3 and1*10–6 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 40 MHz digital
346 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 177. STM–1 BER 1*10–3 and 1*10–6 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 30 MHz digital
interference
Fig. 178. STM–0 BER 1*10–3 and 1*10–6 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 14 MHz digital
interference
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
STM1/128QAM BER = 1 x 10 –4
ED 03
514
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
STM1/128QAM BER = 1 x 10 –6
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
ED 03
514
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
STM0/128QAM BER = 1 x 10 –4
ED 03
514
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
STM0/128QAM BER = 1 x 10 –6
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
ED 03
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
352 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
Chapter 7 – Maintenance
SECTION CONTENT
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
355
PAGE
MAINTENANCE
353 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
354 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
7 MAINTENANCE
7.1 Introduction
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Maintenance consists of a set of operations which maintain or bring back the assembly to optimum
operating conditions in a very short time, with the aim of obtaining maximum operational availability.
Maintenance is classified as:
– ROUTINE (preventive)
– CORRECTIVE (troubleshooting and repair)
This chapter describes the routine and corrective maintenance of 9600LSY equipment in the LHR
configuration, and and is organized as follows:
ED 03
514
7.2 Warnings
WHEN CARRYING OUT THE GIVEN OPERATIONS OBSERVE THE NORMS STATED IN PARA.
19.4.3 ON PAGE 493
The Safety Rules stated in para.19.3 on page 484 thru 490 describe the operations and/or precautions
to observe to safeguard operating personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment
safety.
Please read them with accuracy before to start every action on the equipments.
SAFETY RULES
General
Should it be necessary to cut off power during the maintenance phase, proceed
to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station upstream
(rack or station distribution frame)
Electrical safety
Optical safety
DANGER: Possibility of eyes damage: read carefully and strictly observe the
rules pointed out in para.19.3.4.2 on page 488.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
7.2.3 Maintenance Personnel skill
– and with the use of the Craft Terminal applications of the equipment this handbook refers to.
Without these prerequisites, reading this handbook and the associated handbooks indicated in para.18.2
on page 466 is usually not enough to properly maintain equipment.
There is a local terminal (PC–ECT) which permits to display all the alarms and manages the Equipment.
The relative processing is described in the relevant Craft Terminal Operator’s Handbook (see Tab. 79. on
page 468).
When a TMN is implemented, an Operation System will display alarms and manage all the connected
Equipment of the network. Refer to the relevant handbooks.
– connection with the PC is achieved through connector (M3) available on the System Controller unit
– through connectors (J1) to (J3), the same unit can be connected to an Operations System associated
to the Transmission Management Network in order to execute operations similar to those carried out
by the PC.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
7.3.2 System and Maintenance Tool Kits
The following Tab. 59. lists the items contained in the LSY SYSTEM TOOL KIT (for P/N see REF.[40] in
Tab. 13. on page 122). Drawings and descriptions are given for special items.
ED 03
514
The following Tab. 60. lists the items contained in the LSY MAINTENANCE TOOL KIT (for P/N see
REF.[41] in Tab. 13. on page 122). Drawings and descriptions are given for special items.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
plug M1 or M2
in Fig. 89. on page 167
ED 03
514
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Extractor for Electrical/Optical module Cables 1.0/2.3 extractor
and Fans Assembled Unit
ED 03
514
7.4 Alarm Description
All the alarms detected on the units are collected and processed by the System Controller unit in
Baseband shelf which gives centralized optical indications by means of LEDs on its front coverplate.
– Yellow LED ATTD (3): alarm condition ATTENDED (see para.7.4.1.1 herebelow)
N.B. On the Craft Terminal (C.T.) and on the Operation System (O.S). application the URGENT
(URG), NOT URGENT (NURG) and INDICATIVE alarm are named in a different way; the
relationship between this two terminologies is explained in Tab. 61. herebelow.
Tab. 61. Relationship between Alarm severity terminology displayed on C.T./O.S. and alarm severity
terminology used for the System Controller unit remote alarm connector pins.
ED 03
514
7.4.1.1 Alarm Attending
– a possible new alarm condition (following the Attending) will turn on the LEDs URG (1) or NURG (2).
– when the fault has been repaired, the yellow lamp (if the alarm had been attended) or the red ones
(if the alarm had not been attended and no further alarms had occurred in the mean time) will turn
off.
7.4.1.2 Relationship between Alarms and their severity (Urgent / Not Urgent)
ED 03
514
7.4.2 Station Alarms (TRU)
Some equipment alarms processed by the System Controller unit are carried to Baseband shelf’s
connector M184 and then lead by a cable to TRU’s connector M8 in order to switch on/off the TRU alarm
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
lamps.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
The four alarm lamps on TRU are depicted in Fig. 186. herebelow.
RED (1)
RED (2)
YELLOW
GREEN
– The RED (1) lamp is activated in case of urgent (URG) alarm and a relevant tele–alarm is released
(this last function is excludible).
– The RED (2) lamp is activated in case of non urgent (minor) alarm and a relevant tele–alarm is
released (this last function is excludible).
– The YELLOW lamp is lighted up in case of manual storing of alarm events (see para.7.4.1.1 on page
362). In this case the RED lamps are switched off to be ready to other new alarm indications. This
YELLOW lamp is lighted up in case of ABNORMAL condition, together with led (4) of System
Controller unit (see para.7.4.1 on page 361).
– The GREEN lamp is activated by the buzzer input. By presetting, it is possible to change this alarm
criteria and to drive the activation with the presence of the service voltage.
The signals sent to TRU are also available for Customer applications on other TRU’s connectors (see
para.4.7.7 on page 208 for connectors, connector pinout and signal description).
All details of the alarms for each card and relevant indications are included in the ”Alarm status” procedure
in the Operator’s Handbook .
Besides the LEDs of Centralized Equipment Alarms described in para.7.4.1 on page 361, some other
equipment units are provided with specific alarm LED on their front coverplate, indicating the failure of
the unit.
Tab. 65. on page 377 lists such LEDs and indicate their normal status (alarm absence).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
7.4.5 Summarizing / Housekeeping Alarms
Summarizing and Housekeeping alarms, processed by the System Controller unit, are made available to
Customer by means of relay contacts whose interface access is described in para.4.7.8 on page 208.
Tab. 63. on page 368 gives the relationship between Remote and Station Alarms.
Tab. 62. Relationship among remote alarms, housekeeping outputs and alarm primitives
Remote alarm Refer. Remote Alarm primitives
TOR ANDOR VBATT1 failure or VBATT2 failure
TAND ANDOR VBATT1 failure and VBATT2 failure
TUP GA2 SYSCO card fail or missing
URG GA4 or of all urgent alarms (severity = Major or Critical)
NURG GA5 or of all not urgent alarms (severity= Minor)
IND GA6 or of all indicative alarms (severity = Warning or
Indeterminate)
ABN GA7 or of all the abnormal conditions
TORC GA8 PSF1 or PSF2 card fail
TANC GA9 PSF1 and PSF2 card fail
Opt STM–1 GA or of the following alarms:
module fail/missing STM–1 Opt. X (X = 0,..,9) module fail
STM–1 Opt. X (X = 0,..,9) module missing
INT GA10 or of all the internal alarms
card fail, card missing,
equipment mismatch, RC unreachable,
battery fail/missing,
LAN alarm,
transmitter Failure, transmitter Degraded
software mismatch, software processing error,
housekeeping alarm, unconfigured equipment
FANS card fail/ GA12 or of the following alarms:
missing FANSL X (X = 1,2) card fail (ADM cooling)
FANSL X (X = 1,2) card fail (LHR cooling)
SERV card fail/ GA13 or of the following alarms:
missing Service card fail
Service card missing
TPH–DEV card fail
TPH–DEV card missing
ED 03
514
.. continues Tab. 62.
Remote alarm Refer. Remote Alarm primitives
RRA GA16 N+0: or of the following alarms :
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
ED 03
514
.. continues Tab. 62.
Remote alarm Refer. Remote Alarm primitives
CHX_affect CH0 = GA 20 or of all alarms related to channels X (from 0 to 9) and
communication alarms:
LOS (STM–1 Opt. X)
LOF (STM–1 Opt. X)
transmitterFailure (STM–1 Opt. X)
transmitterDegraded (STM–1 Opt. X)
LOF (RRA X, rsCTPBid line/radio side)
modulationFail (MD X)
modLOS (MD X)
demodulationFail (MD X)
demLOS (MD X)
rxFail (RX X)
txLOS (TRI X)
txFail (TRI X)
incompatibleTxPower (TRI X)
LOF (RRA X, radioSPITTPBidR1)
HBER (MD X)
LBER (MD X)
TIM (RRA X)
RCIM (RRA X)
atpcLoop (RRA X)
atpcIdentifierMismatch (RRA X)
rxDivFail (RX Div. X)
demDivLOS (Second IF X.1)
demXpicLOS (Second or Third IF X.1 or X.2)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
.. continues Tab. 62.
Remote alarm Refer. Remote Alarm primitives
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
CHX on protection CH1 = GA 31 for each channel, it will indicate if the switch is on protecting
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
(X = 1,..,9) CH2 = GA 32 channel (in the N+1 configuration only one channel can be on
CH3 = GA 33 protection)
CH4 = GA 34
CH5 = GA 35
CH6 = GA 36
CH7 = GA 37
CH8 = GA 38
CH9 = GA 39
N.B. Concerning the management of the remote alarms for 1+1 configuration, only the alarms raised
by the boards of the allowed channels have to be considered.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
Tab. 63. Relationship between Remote and Station Alarms
N.B. For the alarm meaning refer to Tab. 62. on page 364
Consequent Remote
ED 03
514
.. continues Tab. 63.
RURG/
LBER SW URG/NURG/IND SW SW
RNURG
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
CHX_affect
document, use and communication of its contents
SW
(X=0..9)
CHX on protection
SW
(X=1..9)
end of Tab. 63.
(note 1) A CHX_affect consequent remote alarm is generated according to the channel affected by the
primary alarm.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
7.5 Set of spare parts
N.B. The unit replacement procedures described in paragraph Corrective Maintenance in this
chapter presume that the units present in the spare–part stock correspond exactly to the plug–in
replaceable units that are equipped in the system, i.e.:
– with the same Part Numbers
– and including the same baby–boards (with the same Part Numbers)1.
with the aim of speeding–up the corrective maintenance and to avoid complex unit manipulation
(baby board mounting/dismounting on/from the main board) which could result in unit and/or
baby–board damage.
N.B.1 As spare part, SYSCO is shipped from factory always with its subunit ESCON already mounted.
Customer is never allowed to dismount it from the main board. Conversely, the SYSCO spare
part is usually shipped from factory without the Flash Card, that is available as individual item.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
1. a policy is under study to supply Customers with spare units already equipped with baby boards,
according to Customer’s System configuration.
ED 03
514
7.5.1.2 Transceivers
Please refer to para.3.7.3 on page 157 for the detailed description of the Transceiver composition in the
various possible configurations.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
Fig. 194. on page 396 shows the Transceiver assembly supplied as spare part. The assembly is
shown with the cover plate removed (see Fig. 80. on page 158).
There are two possibilities:
1) Transceiver + Main Receiver
This assembly includes the following components:
– standard components:
• Transceiver box with covers (see Fig. 80. on page 158)
• RT control
• Amplifier
• Up Converter
• Delay Line
• DC/DC Converter
The P/N of this assembly is frequency dependent.
– Main Receiver
The P/N of this component is frequency dependent.
2) Transceiver only
This assembly includes the standard components cited above, but does not contain the Main
Receiver, whose spare must be provisioned as individual item (see point c ) herebelow).
This assembly (Transceiver + Main Receiver or Transceiver only does not include the following
subcomponents:
– RX Local Oscillator
see point b ) herebelow
– TX Local Oscillator
– Diversity Receiver see point c ) herebelow
– Frequency Reuse kit module see point d ) herebelow
ED 03
514
7.5.2 General rules on spare parts management
Before storing the spare units make sure that they are working by inserting them in an operating equipment
If the spare parts are stored in another room, or have to be moved from another place, building or site,
make sure that the following is observed:
– the spare parts must not touch wet surfaces or chemical agents that might damage them (e.g. gas);
– if during transportation the temperature is lower than that of the room where they had been kept,
make sure that before using them they pass a certain period in a climatic chamber to prevent thermal
shocks and/or the possibility of steaming up.
When replacing a unit/sub–unit, make sure that the spare unit/sub–unit is set exactly as the
replaced one.
Please refer to para.5.2.7 on page 280 for the Flash Card description.
The Flash Card supplied as spare part is empty (i.e. without SW) and must be left ’as it is’ for its possible
use as spare part.
ATTENTION
ED 03
514
7.6 Routine Maintenance
Routine maintenance is a periodic set of measurements and checks. This maintenance discovers those
devices whose function has deteriorated with time and therefore need adjustment or replacement.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
The equipment allows to assess the quality of the connection links or counting the errored events and
obtaining performance data.
The Performance Monitoring Application, described in the Operator’s Handbook, allows this function.
SAFETY RULES
• Visual check:
– During the normal operation, check the led normal condition, as specified in Tab. 65. on
page 377
ED 03
514
[5] Software checks
Use the Craft Terminal to check the system status (see the Operator Handbook). Access the
reference Network Element, select HISTORY DISPLAY, read the alarm history memory, the statuses,
and forcings.
The MTBF of the Fans Assembled Unit equipped below BaseBand shelf (and, if equipped, below
1650SM–C shelf) is about 20 years, provided that Environmental Conditions regarding sand and dust are
in the limits specified by Recc.ETS 300 019 Class 3.1 (see point 6.7.2 on page 333). Even though the
operating environment is compliant with these limits, it is suggested to carry out the following operation
every three years:
– pull out Fans Assembled Unit and clean fans removing dust and sand.
In the case of worse environmental conditions, perform this operation more frequently.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
7.7 Corrective Maintenance
START
Other measures
Unit replacement
(para.7.7.4 page 381).
possible intermittent N
fixed fault ?
failure
Y
Restore spare part in the system and perform
system check via Craft Terminal
END
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
7.7.2 Alarm acknowledgment and attending
• or the same alarms, propagated through the Station Alarms cable, operate the TRU lamps (see
para.7.4.2 on page 363) or similar remote device
• and/or when the alarm LEDs listed in Tab. 65. on page 377 are not in normal status.
– remotely (in a TMN maintenance center) when the OS acknowledges the presence of problems in
the station.
When the local Operator decides to manage the problem, he should carry out the alarm attending
operation (see para.7.4.1.1 on page 362). This operation has the scope to notify locally in the station and
remotely to the TMN maintenance center that a local operator is attending the problem.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
7.7.3 Trouble–Shooting
Some problems may be localized looking the LEDs indicated in following Tab. 65. In any case, the
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
inspection through the Craft Terminal (if possible) is recommended before doing any unit replacement.
TRU SHELF
NORMAL
UNIT FIGURE LED
STATUS
RRA–CHANNEL and
Fig. 71. on page 148 (1) red OFF
RRA–STANDBY (0–9)
TRANSCEIVER SHELF
NORMAL
UNIT FIGURE LED
STATUS
(1) green ON
Transceiver (0–9) Fig. 89. on page 167
(2) red OFF
FANS Assembled (0–1) Fig. 93. on page 172 (1) red OFF
ED 03
514
Before starting this inspection, perform lamp test (para 3.6.2.1 page 142).
START
N Y
N
any PSU green
verify circuit breakers on TRU
led off ? Y (see para.3.4 on page 128)
Y Y
PSU switch on ? problem solved?
N
N
why ?
solve problem
N
OK ?
N Y
login successful ?
ED 03
514
7.7.3.2 Trouble–Shooting via Craft Terminal
The 9600LSY LHR equipment has been designed to dialog with a Personal Computer (PC) in order to
service, activate and trouble–shoot the equipment.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
The troubleshooting operating instructions and details of the alarms for each card and relevant
indications are included in the ”Alarm status” procedure in the Operator Handbook (section
Maintenance).
The operating instructions make it possible to identify the faulty unit for all assemblies of the system.
Having located the suspected faulty unit/module, replace it with a spare one (see para.7.7.4 on page 381).
Whenever the login with the Craft Terminal does not work, proceed with the following checks:
– With the Craft Terminal connected to the equipment F–interface, open the ’Alcatel Lower Layer
Manager’ screen (by clicking with the mouse pointer on the Alcatel symbol in the MS–Windows
menu bar). The fields to be verified in this screen are:
– Verify that the CT port is effectively that connected by cable to equipment’s F interface
• the cable
If possible, verify the correct working of the Craft Terminal and of the CT–F interface cable using them
with another Alcatel equipment. If the problem persists also with it, solve the problem.
Otherwise, proceed with the SYSCO unit replacement, or perform steps indicated in para.7.7.3.4 on
page 380.
Proceed with the SYSCO unit replacement, or perform steps indicated in para.7.7.3.4 on page 380.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
7.7.3.4 CARD FAIL red led on SYSCO Unit turned on
If the bicolor LED CARD FAIL on SYSCO unit is red–on (led (6) in Fig. 185. on page 361), (or it is off, but
lamp test does not work) and the Craft Terminal application:
1) push the RESET button on SYSCO unit (button (9) in Fig. 67. on page 141) and wait 3 minutes;
2) if, within 3 minutes, the Craft Terminal application responds, open the ”Alarm status” procedure
and proceed investigating the system state;
3) if, after 3 minutes, the Craft Terminal application does not respond, replace the SYSCO unit,
as described in para.7.7.4.4 on page 384;
4) if the problem persists also after the SYSCO unit replacement, the failure or content corruption
of the FLASH CARD must be suspected (a very extraordinary event); proceed with its
replacement, as indicated in para.7.7.4.5 on page 384.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
7.7.4 Unit replacement
7.7.4.1 Introduction
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
This procedure is fully applicable, without additional instructions, to the following types of units:
– SERVICE
– RRA–CHANNEL
– RRA–STANDBY
– PSF
– ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING (taking into account its different housing and fixing by bolts, as
depicted in Fig. 77. on page 154).
– TRANSCEIVER
Two cases must be distinguished:
• a spare Transceiver already assembled is available, fully equipped with internal parts exactly
equal (types and P/Ns) to those of the Transceiver unit to be replaced; in this case proceed as
specified in para.7.7.4.7 on page 386.
For the operative instructions and physical view of each board refer to the relevant paragraph of chapter
3 (list on page 121).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
7.7.4.2 General procedure
The replacement of a suspected faulty unit/module with one taken from the spare part stock must
be done in the following way:
2) disconnect all cables (and, before, protection cap, if present on the Optical module of RRA unit)
from the front plate. Suggestion: before doing it, if no labels are present on the cables, put labels
with writings to be able to reconnect them correctly;
N.B. to extract Cables 1.0/2.3, use the special extractor (see Fig. 184. on page 360)
– wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 230. on page 494) and connect its
termination to a grounded structure
ATTENTION
– turn off the screws present into the extraction/insertion levers of the board
ATTENTION
4) only for RRA units: if the unit is equipped with Optical module to be recovered and mounted on
the spare part, extract it and mount it on the spare part (refer to para.7.7.4.9 on page 407 for
details)
– accessing the section Hardware setting documentation in this handbook, check if the
board has hardware settings:
6) insert the spare plug–in board in the system operating the levers
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
7) now you could wear off the antistatic protection device kit
ED 03
514
8) turn on the screws present into the extraction/insertion levers of the board
ATTENTION
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
9) re–connect all cables (and, after, the protection cap, if were present on the Optical module of
RRA unit) on the front plate exactly as they were connected before the unit extraction.
10 ) wait some minutes (software download is usually carried out toward Supervisory Units)
N.B. software download is carried out only if the SW version present in the spare unit’s SU
is different from that present in the FLASH CARD.
11 ) check the system status by LED visual inspection and through the Craft Terminal.
2) turn off (position ’O’ ) the switch on the PSU unit front panel (see Fig. 76. on page 153):
ATTENTION
4) turn on (position ’I’ ) the switch on the new PSU unit front panel (see Fig. 76. on page 153)
ED 03
514
7.7.4.4 SYSCO replacement procedure
– accessing the section Hardware setting documentation in this handbook, get the
relevant MSZZQ documents
– get the spare unit SYSCO and, using the above said documents to locate switches:
a) set the dip–switches on ESCON subunit exactly as those of the replaced unit
ATTENTION
b) set the dip–switches on SYSCO main board exactly as those of the replaced unit
ATTENTION
4) re–insert the FLASH CARD into the spare unit SYSCO (in case of doubts see Fig. 66. on page
140)
N.B. software download is carried out only if the SW version present in the spare unit’s SC,
RC and SU, is different from that present in the FLASH CARD.
7) connect Craft Terminal and check the system status by its Alarm application.
Its replacement with an empty spare FLASH CARD (see para.7.5.3 on page 372) must be done
following the specific instructions given in the C.T. Operator’s Handbook.
ED 03
514
7.7.4.6 MODEM replacement procedure
2) turn off (position ’O’ ) the switch on the PSU unit front panel (see Fig. 76. on page 153) of the
PSU corresponding to the MODEM unit to be replaced, i.e.:
– PSU–0 for MD–0
– PSU–1 for MD–1
– ....
– PSU–9 for MD–9
according to following Fig. 189.
ATTENTION
S S R R R R R R M R M R M R M R M
M M M M M
Y E R R R R R R D R D R D R D R D
D D D D D
S R A A A A A A 5 A 6 A 7 A 8 A 9
0 1 2 3 4
C V 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
O
P P P P P P P P P P P P
S S S S S S S S S S S S
F U U U U U U U U U U F
1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
4) turn on (position ’I’ ) the switch on the PSU unit previously switched off
ED 03
514
7.7.4.7 TRANSCEIVER replacement procedure
N.B. This procedure can be followed if a spare Transceiver is available, fully equipped with
internal parts exactly equal (types and P/Ns) to those of the Transceiver unit to be
ATTENTION
ATTENTION
ED 03
514
7.7.4.8 TRANSCEIVER repair and replacement procedure
N.B. This procedure must be followed if Transceiver components are available as individual
spare parts, as explained in para.7.5.1.2 on page 371.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
CONVENTIONS
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
In the following Fig. 194. thru’ Fig. 201. the following conventions have been applied:
• connectors and cables: each connector is denoted by a number and letter (e.g. 11A); the two
ends of a cable have the same number (e.g. 11A and 11B are the two connectors of the same
cable); all cables are two–connector cables, with the exception of connector depicted in
Fig. 195. on page 399.
The instructions given in the following for the replacement of internal components require that
you consult the correct internal cabling diagram, that depends on the configuration:
• the letter ’T’ indicates a screw metallic tap on an unused SMA connector.
ATTENTION: CAUTIONS TO AVOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
ED 03
514
GENERAL FLOW CHART
Replacement of
ED 03
514
Instructions in addition to those given in para.7.7.4.2 on page 382:
a) Start of procedure
Proceed as follows:
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
1) on the TRANSCEIVER unit to be replaced, turn off (position ’O’ ) the switch on the
unit front panel (pos. (I1) in Fig. 89. on page 167)
ATTENTION
4) remove COVERPLATE “A” (see Fig. 80. on page 158) of the Transceiver to be
repaired. Store tidely cover and screws for successive mounting.
NEXT STEP
ED 03
514
b) Replacement of Rx or Tx Local Oscillator
The spare subassembly is as in Fig. 191. herebelow.
SMA CONNECTORS
A1
A3
A2
MMCX CONNECTOR
ED 03
514
Proceed as follows:
1) according to Tab. 66. on page 387, get the correct transceiver internal cabling
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
2) verify which LO must be replaced (Rx or Tx). Operate on that, in the following steps
3) turn off cable’s connectors present on LO’s SMA connectors (but, do not dismount
metallic screw taps present on unconnected SMA connectors)
6) turn off screws A1, A2, A3 and extract the LO; store tidely screws for successive
mounting
7) get the spare LO from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the
component to be replaced (see para.7.5.2 on page 372 for cautions); do not touch
the electronic components.
8) dismount the metallic screw taps present on SMA connectors of faulty LO and mount
them on the same SMA connectors of the spare LO
See point d ) on page 387 for tightening torque
9) position spare LO inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1, A2, A3
NEXT STEP
ED 03
514
c) Replacement of Diversity Receiver
The spare subassembly is as in Fig. 192. herebelow.
A4 A5 A6
A7 A8 A9
P/N and
Remote Inventory
N.B.
– A1 to A9 show the position of the three screws fixing the Diversity Receiver
to the “PLATE COVERING MAIN RECEIVER”
– The SMA connector is for mounting coaxial cable by screwed connector.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
Proceed as follows:
1) according to Tab. 66. on page 387, get the correct transceiver internal cabling
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
2) turn off cable’s connector present on Diversity Receiver’s SMA connector (6A)
4) turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Diversity Receiver; store tidely screws for
successive mounting
5) get the spare Receiver from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that
of the component to be replaced (see para.7.5.2 on page 372 for cautions); do not
touch the electronic components.
6) position spare Receiver inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1 ... A9
NEXT STEP
ED 03
514
d) Replacement of Main Receiver
The spare subassembly is as in Fig. 192. on page 392.
Proceed as follows:
ED 03
514
e) Replacement of Frequency Reuse kit module
The spare subassembly is as in Fig. 193. herebelow.
A1
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
P/N
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
CONNECTOR FOR
FLAT CABLE (10C)
A3
A2
N.B.
– A1 to A4 show the position of the three screws fixing the Frequency Reuse kit
module to to the Transceiver
– The SMA connectors are for mounting coaxial cables by screwed connector.
Proceed as follows:
NEXT STEP
9) go to step h ) on page 402
ED 03
514
f) Replacement of Transceiver + Main Receiver
The spare subassembly is as in Fig. 194. herebelow.
1A 2A 4A* 3A*
This subassembly includes just the internal cabling necessary for the basic configuration
(i.e. without diversity and without frequency reuse); this internal cabling corresponds to
that depicted in Fig. 196. on page 403.
In few words, the procedure (that is detailed in the following) consists of:
ED 03
514
Proceed as follows:
1) according to Tab. 66. on page 387, get the correct transceiver internal cabling
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
2) get the spare spare Transceiver + Main Receiver (Fig. 194. on page 396) from the
spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the component to be replaced
(N.B.); see para.7.5.2 on page 372 for cautions; do not touch the electronic
components.
N.B. the P/N label position is shown in Fig. 80. on page 158. This P/N is just
that of the Transceiver only. If you wish to verify also the Main Receiver
P/N, you should dismount it and then remount as indicated here, with
reference to Fig. 196. on page 403:
• remove the plate covering main receiver (8 screws); store tidely cover and
screws for successive mounting
• turn off cable’s connector present on Main Receiver’s SMA connector (4B)
• pull out flat cable from Main Receiver’s suitable connector (5A)
• turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Main Receiver; store tidely screws
for successive mounting
• now you can check the Main Receiver P/N (see Fig. 192. on page 392)
• position Main Receiver inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1 ...
A9
• push flat cable into Main Receiver’s suitable connector (5A)
• turn on cable’s connectors on Main Receiver’s SMA connector (4B)
See point d ) on page 387 for tightening torque
• position and fix the plate covering main receiver (8 screws)
3) remove spare Transceiver’s COVERPLATE “A” (see Fig. 80. on page 158). Store
tidely cover and screws for successive mounting.
With reference to Fig. 191. on page 390 (LO drawing) and Fig. 196. on page 403
(transceiver standard internal cabling) operate on both Rx and Tx Local Oscillators as
follows:
5) turn off cable’s connectors present on LO’s SMA connectors (but, do not dismount
metallic screw taps present on unconnected SMA connectors)
9) store tidely Rx and Tx Local Oscillators and their screws for successive mounting
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
REMOTION OF DIVERSITY RECEIVER FROM FAULTY TRANCEIVER (if equipped)
With reference to Fig. 192. on page 392 (Receiver drawing) and transceiver internal
cabling diagram of step 1 ) on page 397, operate on faulty Transceiver as follows:
12 ) turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Diversity Receiver together with the flat
cable 7A–7B and the cable 6A–6B connected to it; store tidely the assembly and
screws for successive mounting
With reference to Fig. 192. on page 392 (Receiver drawing) and transceiver internal
cabling diagram of step 1 ) on page 397, operate on spare Transceiver + Main Receiver
as follows:
13 ) position the Diversity Receiver (together with the flat cable 7A–7B and the cable
6A–6B connected to it) inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1 ... A9
14 ) position the flat cable 7A–7B and insert its connector 7B according to cabling diagram
ED 03
514
REMOTION OF FR KIT FROM FAULTY TRANCEIVER (if equipped)
With reference to Fig. 193. on page 395 (FR module drawing) and transceiver internal
cabling diagram of step 1 ) on page 397, operate on faulty Transceiver as follows:
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
16 ) DO NOT remove cable’s connectors present on Frequency Reuse kit module’s SMA
connector (8B and 9A)
19 ) turn off screws A1 .. A4 and extract the module together with cables 8B–8A and
9A–9B connected to it
ÊÊÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊ ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊ 10C
10B 10A
Fig. 195. Spare Frequency Reuse kit 3–connector flat cable subassembly
21 ) if present (see Fig. 200. and Fig. 201. on page 406) disconnect connector 11A from
Transceiver’s front plate
23 ) With reference to Fig. 196. on page 403, remove flat cable 10A–10B (it is no longer
necessary)
a) insert flat cable 10A–10B–10C on Transceiver’s connectors 10A and 10B and
position cable end 10C according to cabling diagram
b) if cable 11A–11B was equipped, mount its connector 11A on Transceiver’s front
plate and position cable end 11B according to cabling diagram
c) position module (together with cables 8B–8A and 9A–9B connected to it) inside
transceiver and fix it through screws A1 ... A4
ED 03
514
INSERTION OF LOCAL OSCILLATORS INTO SPARE “TRANSCEIVER + MAIN
RECEIVER”
With reference to Fig. 191. on page 390 (LO drawing) and transceiver internal cabling
N.B. Distinguish Rx from Tx LOs, because the use of SMA connectors is different
from each other
NEXT STEP
ED 03
514
g) Replacement of Transceiver
The spare subassembly is similar to that shown in Fig. 194. on page 396. With respect to
it, the missing items are:
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
• and the cables 4A–4B and 5B–5A that belong to the Receiver own part list
Proceed as follows:
REFERENCE INTERNAL CABLING DIAGRAM
1) as step 1 ) on page 397
PREPARATION OF SPARE TRANSCEIVER
2) as steps 2 ) to 4 ) on page 397
REMOTION OF LOCAL OSCILLATORS FROM FAULTY TRANCEIVER
3) as steps 5 ) to 9 ) on page 397
REMOTION OF DIVERSITY RECEIVER FROM FAULTY TRANCEIVER (if equipped)
4) as steps 10 ) to 12 ) on page 398
REMOTION OF MAIN RECEIVER FROM FAULTY TRANCEIVER
With reference to Fig. 192. on page 392 (Receiver drawing) and and Fig. 196. on page
403 (transceiver standard internal cabling) operate on faulty Transceiver as follows:
5) remove the plate covering Main Receiver (8 screws); store tidely cover and screws
for successive mounting
6) DO NOT remove cable’s connector present on Main Receiver’s SMA connector 4B
7) DO NOT remove flat cable from connector 5A
8) turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Main Receiver together with the flat cable
5A–5B and the cable 4B–4A connected to it; store tidely the assembly and screws
for successive mounting
9) restore the plate covering Main Receiver (8 screws)
INSERTION OF MAIN RECEIVER INTO SPARE TRANSCEIVER
With reference to Fig. 192. on page 392 (Receiver drawing) and and Fig. 196. on page
403 (transceiver standard internal cabling) operate on spare Transceiver as follows:
10 ) remove the plate covering Main Receiver (8 screws); store tidely cover and screws
for successive mounting
11 ) position the Main Receiver (together with the flat cable 5A–5B and the cable 4B–4A
connected to it) inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1 ... A9
12 ) position the flat cable 5A–5B and insert its connector 5B according to cabling diagram
13 ) position the cable 4B–4A according to cabling diagram
14 ) restore the plate covering Main Receiver (8 screws)
NEXT STEPS
15 ) as steps 13 ) (page 398) thru’ 29 ) (page 400)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
h) End of procedure
Proceed as follows:
2) verify that, on the repaired Transceiver’s front panel, the switch pos. (I1) in Fig. 89. on
page 167 is turned off (position ’O’ )
ATTENTION
4) turn on (position ’I’ ) the switch on the new TRANSCEIVER unit front panel (pos. (I1)
in Fig. 89. on page 167)
ED 03
514
WITHOUT DIVERSITY AND WITHOUT FREQUENCY REUSE
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
main receiver
T1 4A T3 T4 3A T6 T7
1A 2A T8
Rx LO Tx LO
3B
ED 03
514
WITH DIVERSITY AND WITHOUT FREQUENCY REUSE
WITH DIVERSITY AND WITH FREQUENCY REUSE, RX LO SLAVE
Rx LO Tx LO
diversity receiver 1B
7A 2B
7B 10B 12B
5B*
10A 12A
* For 3B, 4B and 5A see Fig. 196. on page 403
ED 03
514
WITHOUT DIVERSITY AND WITH FREQUENCY REUSE, RX LO MASTER
8A 1A 2A T6 T7 T8
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
T1 T3
8B
Rx LO Tx LO
Rx LO Tx LO
diversity receiver 7A 7B
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
WITHOUT DIVERSITY AND WITH FREQUENCY REUSE, RX LO SLAVE
11B
Rx LO Tx LO
6B instead of T1
6A
Rx LO Tx LO
diversity receiver 7A 7B
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
7.7.4.9 OPTICAL MODULE replacement procedure
N.B. In order to replace an Optical module without replacing the RRA unit housing it, it is not
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
ATTENTION
ED 03
514
7.7.4.10 Fans Assembled Unit replacement in case of alarm
because an excessive internal temperature could decrease the equipment overall MTBF.
In conclusion:
• the Fans Assembled Unit MINOR alarm usually does not require an immediate intervention;
nevertheless, in case of alarm, it is suggested to carry out the unit replacement without waiting
a very long time.
• the Fans Assembled Unit MAJOR alarm requires an immediate intervention.
2) Remove FANS SHELF’s front plate (see Fig. 92. on page 171) turning off the six screws
3) wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 230. on page 494) and connect its termination
to a grounded structure
ATTENTION
4) Extract the faulty FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT operating the suitable extractor (see Fig. 184. on
page 360) inside the unit’s suitable hole (see Fig. 93. on page 172)
6) now you could wear off the antistatic protection device kit
7) Restore FANS SHELF’s front plate (see Fig. 92. on page 171) turning on the six screws
ATTENTION
8) check the system status by LED visual inspection and through the Craft Terminal.
ED 03
514
7.8 Faulty unit repair and Repair Form
According to the policy (under study) described in footnote <1.> on page 370, the units with baby–boards
(see Tab. 64. on page 370) must be sent back to the repair center together with their baby–boards, without
dismounting them from the assembly.
To facilitate repair operation, data on the faulty unit must be reported on the form shown in Fig. 202. on
page 410.
The repair form must be filled–in with as much data as possible and returned to Alcatel together with the
faulty unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
ALCATE L
REPAIR FORM
Fill in this form and affix it to the faulty unit to be returned to Alcatel
SITE BRANCH/UNIT/COUNTRY
LIGHTNING
OPERATION INTERMITTENT FAULT UPGRADE/QUALITY ALERT
EXTERNAL AIR COND.
COMMENTS
COMMENTS
ED 03
514
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
ED 03
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
412 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
8 INTRODUCTION TO SECTION ’FREQUENCY PLANS & PART NUMBERS’
In this section, the Part Numbers and the Remote Inventory Labels of the frequency–dependent items
(transceiver components) are given.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
The transceiver components are described in para.3.7.2 thru’ 3.7.4 on pages 156 thru’ 161.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
N.B. : for frequency–independent items please refer to Tab. 13. on page 122.
Moreover, the channel plans utilized with 9600 LSY radios and criteria to be taken into account for the
use of each specific one are described, according to the following general notes:
The main parameters affecting the choice of radio–frequency channel arrangements, according to ITU–R
Rec. F.746, are :
CS Channel Separation between two consecutive centre frequencies for the related alternated
radio–frequency channel arrangement: it is also considered equal to the Channel Bandwidth.
DS Tx/Rx Duplex Spacing, defined as the radio–frequency separation between corresponding go and
return channels, constant for each couple of ith and i’th frequencies, within a given channel
arrangement.
Main spectrum utilization characteristics for each frequency band of the 9600 LSY family are summarized
in Tab. 67. on page 414.
In general, the equipment of this family may work, in case of for STM–1 stream, in co–channel frequency
re–use operation (CCDP), utilizing the XPIC unit, allowing the transmission of 2 x STM–1 signals on a
single RF channel.
ED 03
514
Tab. 67. Implemented radio–frequency channel arrangements and list of Chapters
CHANNEL
FREQUENCY ITU–R SDH CHAP-
SYSTEM SPACING
(GHz) FREQ. PLAN TRANSPORT TER
17 on
9613 LSY 12.75 – 13.25 ITU–R F.497 rec. 1 14 – 28 STM–0 / STM–1
page 459
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
9 9640LSY
Label for
MAX
NAME ANV P/N Factory P/N Remote
Qty
Inventory
9640LSY TRANSCEIVER
N.B. Refer to para.para.3.7.2 thru’ 3.7.4 on pages 156 thru’ 161. for summary information on
transceiver composition and equipping notes
ED 03
514
9.2 9640LSY frequency plans
The possible channel plans to be used with 9640LSY equipment, for the exploitation of the 3.6 to 4.2 GHz
or 3.8 to 4.2 GHz bands, are shown in the figures from Fig. 203. to Fig. 209. :
Warning: because of the third order intermodulation product caused by the antenna circulator, the
utilization of high power amplifiers is allowed only utilizing channel plans with alternate polarized channels.
It means that, in general, no reused channels can be used.
See Fig. 203. on page 418 and Fig. 204. on page 419.
Both channels are based on a frequency channel spacing of 40 MHz. 9640LSY can work in frequency
re–use operation (CCDP) by utilization of XPIC unit, allowing the transmission of 14xSTM–1 signals,
the maximum system configuration being 2 x (6 + 1). In this case each RF channel is contemporary
used on H and V polarization, requiring double Polarises antennas. The minimum frequency distance
between two adjacent channels on the same branching is 40 MHz.
All the odd and even channels can be connected to the same antenna polarization.
In case of simple transmission of a single STM– 1 per RF frequency, channel plan A) and B) allow
the use of a single Polarises antenna up to a 6+1 system configurations .
Channel plan C
Channel plan in Fig. 205. on page 420 is completely defined, for the exploitation of the 3.8–4.2 GHz
band, by ITU–R Recommendation F.382, fig.3, with the center frequency by recommends 6 (or
recommends 5, for the interleaved channels).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
Channel plan D
the exploitation of the 3.6–4.2 band by the addition of three RF channels. This channel plan then
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
allows, theoretically, the use of a system with 9 go and return channels, but the actual limit of the
9600LSY system is of using separately channels from A to C with an up to 2+1 system or channels
from 1 to 6 with an up to 5+1 system.
Channel plans are based on a frequency channel spacing of 29 MHz and 9640LH may work in
frequency re–use operation (CCDP) up to 2x(5+1) system configuration.
In this case each RF channel is contemporary used on H and V polarizations always requiring double
polarized antennas .
In case of simple transmission of a single STM–I per RF frequency, channel plans allow the use of
a single Polarises antenna up to a 2+ 1 system configuration (using double Polarises antennas the
limit is 5+1).
These limits are derived from the minimum distance between adjacent channels on the same
branching, equal to 58 MHz in this case and from the maximum of 7+1 for the multichannel protection
system
Channel plan E
Channel plan in Fig. 207. on page 422 is used in UK, and is defined by DTI (Department of Trade
and Industry). This channel plan is based on 28 MHz channel spacing. Limit for a multichannel
system is 4+1, using single polarized antenna, and 7+1 using double polarized antenna. These limits
are derived from the minimum distance between adjacent channels on the same branching, equal
to 56 MHz in this case, and from the maximum of 7+ l of the multichannel protection system.
Channel plan F
Channel plan in Fig. 208. on page 423 has been recently defined (January ’97) in ITU–R
Recommendation F.635, Annex 1, fig.6, for the exploitation of the 3.6–4.2 GHz band and adopted
by Italian administration.
It allows 9 go and return channels spaced 30 MHz with a centre gap of 80 MHz.
9640LH can work in this plan with frequency re–use operation (CCDP), by means of the XPIC unit,
allowing the transmission of 2xSTM–1 signals per RF channel [up to 2x(7+1)]. In this case each RF
channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring double polarized antennas.
In case of simple transmission of a single STM– I per RF frequency, channel plans in Figure 15. at
page 53 allows the use of up to a 4+1 system configuration on a single polarized antenna . Using
double polarized antennas the limit is 7+1 (these limits are derived from the minimum distance
between adjacent channels on the same branching, equal to 60 MHz in this case, and from the
maximum of 7+1 for the multichannel protection system).
Channel plan G
Channel plan shown in Fig. 209. on page 424 is used in Russia and is defined by OIRT. It is based
on 28 MHz channel spacing and can be used also in CCDP operation.
Limits for a multichannel system are 3+1 using single polarized antenna and 7+1 using double
polarized antenna.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
9640 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R Recommendation F.635. fig.3/Annex 1
STM–1
ITU–R F 635
1 3620 1’ 3940
2 3660 2’ 3980
3 3700 3’ 4020
4 3740 4’ 4060
5 3780 5’ 4100
6 3820 6’ 4140
7 3860 7’ 4180
H (V)
2 4 6 2’ 4’ 6’
V (H) 1 3 5 7 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’
f0 = 3900
Fig. 203. 9640 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R Recommendation F.635. fig.3/Annex 1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
9640 LSY Channel plan B: – ITU–R F.635 recommends 1
ITU–R F 635
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
STM–1
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
CS=40 DS=320
fn=f0–320+40n
fn’=f0+40n,
f0=3890,
n : from 1 to 7
1 3610 1’ 3930
2 3650 2’ 3970
3 3690 3’ 4010
4 3730 4’ 4050
5 3770 5’ 4090
6 3810 6’ 4130
7 3850 7’ 4170
H (V)
2 4 6 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’
1 3 5 7 2’ 4’ 6’
V (H)
f0 = 3890
ED 03
514
9640 LSY Channel plan C: ITU–R Recommendation F.382
H (V)
2 4 6 2’ 4’ 6’
1 3 5 1’ 3’ 5’
V (H)
f0 = 4003.5
N.B. Note: Dotted arrows indicate interleaved channels. Each channel is 14.5 MHz lower than the
correspondent main plan channel.
ED 03
514
9640 LSY Channel plan D: ITU–R F. 382 (Extended ) Recommendation
STM–1 STM–1
CS=29 ; DS=213 CS=29 ; DS=213
fn=f0–208+29n fn=f0–208+29n
fn’=f0+5+29n fn’=f0+5+29n
f0=4003.5 f0=3989
n : from 1 to 6 n : from 1 to 6
f0 = 3689 f0 = 3989
H (V)
B’ A C 2 4 6 2’ 4’ 6’
V (H) A’ C’ B 1 3 5 1’ 3’ 5’
f0 = 3703.5 f0 = 4003.5
N.B. Dotted arrows indicate interleaved channels. Each channel is 14.5 MHz lower than the
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 206. 9640 LSY Channel plan D: ITU–R F. 382 (Extended ) Recommendation
ED 03
514
9640 LSY Channel plan E: DTI channel plan
DTI
1 3633,0 1’ 3941,0
2 3661,0 2’ 3969,0
3 3689,0 3’ 3997,0
4 3717,0 4’ 4025,0
5 3745,0 5’ 4053,0
6 3773,0 6’ 4081,0
7 3801,0 7’ 4109,0
8 3829,0 8’ 4137,0
9 3857,0 9’ 4165,0
3633 3689 3745 3801 3857 3941 3997 4053 4109 4165
H (V)
2 4 6 8 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’
V (H) 1 3 5 7 9 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’ 9’
f0 = 3899
ED 03
514
9640 LSY Channel plan F: ITU–R Recommendation F.635, Annex 1, fig.6
STM–1
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
CS=30 DS=320
fn=f0–310+30n
fn’=f0+10+30n,
f0=3900
n : from 1 to 9
1 3620 1’ 3940
2 3650 2’ 3970
3 3680 3’ 4000
4 3710 4’ 4030
5 3740 5’ 4060
6 3770 6’ 4090
7 3800 7’ 4120
8 3830 8’ 4150
9 2860 9’ 4180
3620 3680 3740 3800 3860 3940 4000 4060 4120 4180
H (V)
2 4 6 8 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’
V (H) 1 3 5 7 9 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’ 9’
f0 = 3900
Fig. 208. 9640 LSY Channel plan F: ITU–R Recommendation F.635, Annex 1, fig.6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
9640 LSY Channel plan G: O.I.R.T. (Russia)
O.I.R.T.
1 3422,5 1’ 3688,5
2 3450,5 2’ 3716,5
3 3478,5 3’ 3744,5
4 3506,5 4’ 3772,5
5 3534,5 5’ 3800,5
6 3562,5 6’ 3828,5
7 3590,5 7’ 3856,5
8 3618,5 8’ 3884,5
H (V)
1 3 5 7 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’
V (H) 2 4 6 8 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’
f0 = 3653.5
ED 03
514
10 9647LSY
Label for
MAX
NAME ANV P/N Factory P/N Remote
Qty
Inventory
9647LSY TRANSCEIVER
N.B. Refer to para.para.3.7.2 thru’ 3.7.4 on pages 156 thru’ 161. for summary information on
transceiver composition and equipping notes
In Fig. 210. and Fig. 211. the channel plans for the 9647LSY equipment to be used for the exploitation
of the 4.4 to 5.0 GHz band are shown.
The channel plan shown in Fig. 210. on page 426 is completely defined by the fig.2/Annex 1 of ITU–R
Recommendation F.1099.
This channel plan is based on a frequency channel spacing of 40 MHz. 9647LSY can work with frequency
re–use operation (CCDP) allowing the transmission of 14xSTM–1 signals [max system configuration
being 2 x (6 + 1)].
In this case each RF channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization, requiring double polarized
antennas.
The minimum frequency gap between two adjacent channels on the same branching is 40 MHz and all
the odd and even channels can be connected to the same polarization of the antenna .
Note that, even in case of transmission of a single STM–1 per RF carrier, this channel plan requires always
the use of double polarized antenna due to the different polarization of the go and return channel.
The channel plan shown in Fig. 211. on page 427 is a specific channel plan used in Spain by the Spanish
defence department and it is based on a 28 MHz channel spacing.
Warning: because of the third order intermodulation product caused by the antenna circulator, the
utilization of high power amplifiers is allowed only utilizing channel plans alternate polarized channels. It
means that, in general, no reused channels can be used.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
9647 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R Recommendation F.1099, Annex 1, fig. 2
STM–1
1 4430 1’ 4730
2 4470 2’ 4770
3 4510 3’ 4810
4 4550 4’ 4850
5 4590 5’ 4890
6 4630 6’ 4930
7 4670 7’ 4970
H (V)
2 4 6 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’
(MHz)
1 3 5 7 2’ 4’ 6’
V (H)
f0 = 4700
Fig. 210. 9647 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R Recommendation F.1099, Annex 1, fig. 2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
9647 LSY Channel plan B: Spain Defence
SPAIN DEFENCE
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
CS=28 DS=314
fn=f0–307+28n
fn’=f0+7+28n
f0=4700,
n : from 1 to 9
1 4421 1’ 4735
2 4449 2’ 4763
3 4477 3’ 4791
4 4505 4’ 4819
5 4533 5’ 4847
6 4561 6’ 4875
7 4589 7’ 4903
4421 4477 4533 4589 4645 4735 4791 4847 4903 4959
H (V)
2 4 6 8 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’
V (H) 1 3 5 7 9 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’ 9’
f0 = 4700
N.B. Channels 2, 8, 2’, 8’ are used for low capacity transmission only.
ED 03
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
428 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
11 9662LSY
Label for
MAX
NAME ANV P/N Factory P/N Remote
Qty
Inventory
9662LSY TRANSCEIVER
N.B. Refer to para.para.3.7.2 thru’ 3.7.4 on pages 156 thru’ 161. for summary information on
transceiver composition and equipping notes
In Fig. 212. on page 430 the channel plan for the 9662LSY equipment to be used for the exploitation of
the 5.925 to 6.425 GHz band is shown.
This channel plan (based on 29.65 MHz channel spacing) is completely defined by the ITU–R
Recommendation F.383, using the alternate polarization arrangement defined in recommend 3, and by
the CEPT T/R 14–01.
Another feasible specific channel plan (based on 28 MHz channel spacing) for the OIRT (Russia) is shown
in Fig. 213. on page 431, allowing also the associated 14 MHz shifted pattern.
9662LSY may work in the above plans by co–channel frequency re–use operation (CCDP) with the XPIC
unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM–1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF channel is
contemporary used on H and V polarizations always requiring an external double polarized antenna.
Warning: because of the third order intermodulation product caused by the antenna circulator, the
utilization of high power amplifiers is allowed only utilizing channel plans alternate polarized channels. It
means that, in general, no reused channels can be used.
In case of transmission of a single STM–1 per RF frequency, channel plans allow the use of a single
polarized antenna up to 3+1/4+0 system configuration and using a double polarized antenna up to
7+1/8+0 system configuration.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
9662 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F 383
ITU–R F 383
1 5945,20 1’ 6197,24
2 5974,85 2’ 6226,89
3 6004,50 3’ 6256,54
4 6034,15 4’ 6286,19
5 6063,80 5’ 6315,84
6 6093,45 6’ 6345,49
7 6123,10 7’ 6375,14
8 6152,75 8’ 6404,79
H (V)
2 4 6 8 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’
1 3 5 7 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’
V (H)
f0 = 6175
ED 03
514
9662 LSY Channel plan B: O.I.R.T.
O.I.R.T. O.I.R.T.
STM–1 STM–1
fn=f0–259+28n fn=f0–259+28n
fn’=f0+7+28n fn’=f0+7+28n
036 CS=28 DS=266 CS=28 DS=266
f0=5920 f0=5934
n: from 1 to 8 n: from 1 to 8
H (V)
2 4 6 8 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’
(MHz)
1 3 5 7 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’
V (H)
f0 = 5920
N.B. Dotted arrows indicate interleaved channels. Each channel is 14 MHz higher than
correspondent main channel.
ED 03
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
432 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
12 9667LSY
Label for
MAX
NAME ANV P/N Factory P/N Remote
Qty
Inventory
9667LSY TRANSCEIVER
N.B. Refer to para.para.3.7.2 thru’ 3.7.4 on pages 156 thru’ 161. for summary information on
transceiver composition and equipping notes
In Fig. 214. on page 434 the channel plan for the 9667 LSY equipment to be used for the exploitation of
the 6.4 to 7.1 GHz band is shown.
This channel plan (based on 40 MHz channel spacing) is completely defined by the ITU–R
Recommendation F.384 .
The only difference between the two plans is that in plan a) the go and return channels have different
polarization and in plan b) the polarization is the same.
In case of transmission of a single STM–1 per RF frequency, channel plan a) requires the use of a double
polarized antenna even in case of 1+0 system, due to the different polarization of the Go and return
channel.
On the contrary, channel plan b) allows the use of a single polarized antenna up to 3+1 system
configuration (in both cases max system configuration is 7+1 using double polarized antenna).
9667LSY may work in the above plans by co–channel frequency re–use operation (CCDP) with the XPIC
unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM–1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF channel is
contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna.
Warning: because of the third order intermodulation product caused by the antenna circulator, the
utilization of high power amplifiers is allowed only utilizing channel plans alternate polarized channels. It
means that, in general, no reused channels can be used.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
9667 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F.384, CEPT T/R 14–02
ITU–R F.384
STM–1
1 6460 1’ 6800
2 6500 2’ 6840
3 6540 3’ 6880
4 6580 4’ 6920
5 6620 5’ 6960
6 6660 6’ 7000
7 6700 7’ 7040
8 6740 8’ 7080
Channel plan a)
H (V)
2 4 6 8 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’
V (H) 1 3 5 7 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’
f0 = 6770
Channel plan b)
H (V)
2 4 6 8 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’
V (H) 1 3 5 7 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’
f0 = 6770
Fig. 214. 9667 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F.384, CEPT T/R 14–02
ED 03
514
13 9674LSY
Label for
MAX
NAME ANV P/N Factory P/N Remote
Qty
Inventory
9674LSY TRANSCEIVER
N.B. Refer to para.para.3.7.2 thru’ 3.7.4 on pages 156 thru’ 161. for summary information on
transceiver composition and equipping notes
ED 03
514
13.2 9674LSY frequency plans
In the figures from Fig. 215. to Fig. 220. the possible channel plans for the 9674 LSY equipment to be
used for the exploitation of the 7.1 to 7.9 GHz bands are shown. These channel plans are all based on
– Fig. 216. on page 438: ITU–R F.385 Annex 4 :It is used in UK and It is defined By DTI (Department
of Trade and Industry). Based on 28 MHz channel spacing, in case of simple transmission of a single
STM–1 per RF frequency, channel plans allow the use of a single polarized antenna up to a 3+1/4+0
system configuration and up to 7+1/8+0 using double polarized antennas.
9674LSY may work in the above plan by co–channel frequency re–use operation (CCDP) utilizing
the XPIC unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM–1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF
channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna.
14 MHz channel spacing is available as well to support the STM–0 signal.
– Fig. 217. on page 440: ITU–R F.385 Annex 1 :based on 28 MHz channel spacing, in case of simple
transmission of a single STM–1 per RF frequency, channel plans allow the use of a single polarized
antenna up to a 1+1/2+0 system configuration and up to 3+1 using double polarized antennas, due
to the narrow distance between the innermost channels (42 MHz).
9674LSY may work in the above plan by co–channel frequency re–use operation (CCDP) utilizing
the XPIC unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM–1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF
channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna.
Warning: because of the narrow distance between channels 8 and 1’, with F. 385 Annex 1 channel
plan, the utilization of these channels connected to the same branching is not allowed.
Based on 28 MHz channel spacing, in case of simple transmission of a single STM–1 per RF
frequency, channel plans allow the use of a single polarized antenna up to a 1+1/2+0 system and
of a double polarized antenna up to a 3+1/4+0 system configuration.
This limit is due to the narrow frequency distance between the innermost channels (49 MHz), not
sufficient being these channels on the same antenna polarization.
Three shifted patterns 7 MHz higher are available as well.
LSY may work in the above plan by co–channel frequency re–use operation (CCDP) utilizing the
XPIC unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM–1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF
channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna.
MHz channel spacing is also available to support the STM–0 signal. Shifted pattern (7 MHz higher)
is available as well.
N.B. F385 Rec. 1M in particular supports the channel plan GPR–11 (OIRT–Russia) that utilizes
the channels 1–int3, 2–int3, 3–int3, 4–int3 and 5–int3 (and correspondent 1’–int3, 2’–int3,
3’–int3, 4’–int3 and 5’–int3 return channels) as main channels and 1–int1, 2–int1, 3–int1,
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
4–int1 and 5–int1 and (correspondent 1’–int1, 2’–int1, 3’–int1, 4’–int1 and 5’–int1 return
channels) as interleaved channels.
ED 03
514
9674 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F.385 Annex 3 L&H
fn=f0–182+28n fn=f0–168+28n
f’n=f0+14+28n f’n=f0+28n
f0=7275 f0=7597
n: from1 to 5 n: from1 to 5
H (V)
2 4 2’ 4’
V (H) 1 3 5 1’ 3’ 5’
H (V)
2 4 2’ 4’
V (H) 1 3 5 1’ 3’ 5’
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 215. 9674 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F.385 Annex 3 L&H
ED 03
514
9674 LSY Channel plan B: ITU–R F.385 Annex 4
3 7463 3’ 7708
2 7470 2’ 7715
4 7477 4’ 7722
5 7491 5’ 7736
3 7498 3’ 7743
6 7505 6’ 7750
7 7519 7’ 7764
4 7526 4’ 7771
8 7533 8’ 7778
9 7547 9’ 7792
5 7554 5’ 7799
10 7561 10’ 7806
ED 03
514
... Fig. 216. continues
STM–0
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
7435 7463 7491 7519 7547 7575 7603 7631 7680 7708 7736 7764 7792 7820 7848 7876
H (V)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’ 10’ 12’ 14’ 16’
7449 7477 7505 7533 7561 7589 7617 7645 7694 7722 7750 7778 7806 7834 7862 7890
f0 = 7662.5
STM–1
H (V)
2 4 6 8 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’
V (H) 1 3 5 7 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’
f0 = 7662.5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
9674 LSY Channel plan C: ITU–R F.385 Annex 1
1 7442 1’ 7596
1i 7456 1’ i 7610
2 7470 2’ 7624
2i 7484 2’ i 7638
3 7498 3’ 7652
3i 7512 3’ i 7666
4 7526 4’ 7680
4i 7540 4’ i 7694
5 7554 5’ 7708
5i 7568 5’ i 7722
H (V)
2 4 2’ 4’
V (H) 1 3 5 1’ 3’ 5’
f0 = 7575
ED 03
514
9674 LSY Channel plan D: ITU–R F.385 Rec. 1L
STM–0 STM–1
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
fn=f0–161+14n fn=f0–175+28n
fn’=f0+14n fn’=f0–14+28nn
CS=14 DS=161 CS=28 DS=161
f0=7275 f0=7275
n : from 1 to 10 n : from 1 to 5
ED 03
514
... Fig. 218. continues
STM–0
H (V)
V (H)
7142 7170 7198 7226 7254 7303 7331 7359 7387 7415
7149 7177 7205 7233 7261 7310 7338 7366 7394 7422
STM–1
H (V)
V (H)
ED 03
514
9674 LSY Channel plan E: ITU–R F.385 Rec. 1M
STM–0 STM–1
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
fn=f0–161+14n fn=f0–175+28n
fn’=f0+14n fn’=f0–14+28n
CS=14 DS=161 CS=28 DS=161
f0=7400 f0=7400
n : from 1 to 10 n : from 1 to 5
ED 03
514
... Fig. 219. continues
STM–0
H (V)
V (H)
7267 7295 7323 7351 7379 7428 7456 7484 7512 7540
7274 7302 7330 7358 7386 7435 7463 7491 7519 7547
STM–1
7253 7309 7365 7414 7470 7526
7260 7316 7372 7421 7477 7533
7267 7323 7379 7428 7484 7540
7274 7330 7386 7435 7491 7547
H (V)
V (H)
ED 03
514
9674 LSY Channel plan F: ITU–R F.385 Rec. 1H
STM–0 STM–1
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
fn=f0–161+14n fn=f0–175+28n
fn’=f0+14n fn’=f0–14+28n
CS=14 DS=161 CS=28 DS=161
f0=7575 f0=7575
n : from 1 to 10 n : from 1 to 5
ED 03
514
... Fig. 220. continues
STM–0
H (V)
V (H)
7442 7470 7498 7526 7554 7603 7631 7659 7687 7715
7449 7477 7505 7533 7561 7610 7638 7666 7694 7722
STM–1
7428 7484 7540 7589 7645 7701
7435 7491 7547 7596 7652 7708
7442 7498 7554 7603 7659 7715
7449 7505 7561 7610 7666 7722
H (V)
V (H)
ED 03
514
14 9681LSY
Label for
MAX
NAME ANV P/N Factory P/N Remote
Qty
Inventory
9681LSY TRANSCEIVER
N.B. Refer to para.para.3.7.2 thru’ 3.7.4 on pages 156 thru’ 161. for summary information on
transceiver composition and equipping notes
N.B.1 For 7.7–8.3 GHz band both STM–0 and STM–1 capacity (F386 annex 1) all channels, and
for OIRT (F386 annex 4) only lower halfband channels.
N.B.2 For 8.2–8.5 GHz band both STM–0 and STM–1 capacity (F386 annex 3) all channels, and
for OIRT (F386 annex 4) only upper halfband channels.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
14.2 9681LSY frequency plans
In Fig. 221. thru’ Fig. 223. the possible channel plans for the 9681LSY equipment to be used for the
exploitation of the 7.7 to 8.5 GHz are shown. All these channel plans are based on ITU–R
– Fig. 222. on page 450: ITU–R F.386 ANNEX 3 based on 28 MHz channel spacing, in case of simple
transmission of a single STM–1 per RF frequency, channel plan allows the use of a single polarized
antenna up to a 2+1/3+0 system configuration for odd or even channels and of a double polarized
antenna up to a 5+1/6+0 system configuration for alternated channels . Shifted pattern 14 MHz higher
is available too, loosing the upper channel.
9681LSY may work in the above plan by co–channel frequency re–use operation (CCDP) with the
XPIC unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM–1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF
channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna.
14 MHz channel spacing is available too to support the STM–0 capacity.
– Fig. 223. on page 451: ITU–R F.386 ANNEX 4 based on 28 MHz channel spacing, in case of simple
transmission of a single STM–1 per RF frequency, channel plan allows the use of a single polarized
antenna up to a 3+1/4+0 system configuration and of a double polarized antenna up to a 7+1/8+0
system configuration for alternated channels.
9681LSY may work in the above plan by co–channel frequency re–use operation (CCDP) with the
XPIC unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM–1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF
channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna.
This channel plan is in particular, utilized by OIRT (Russia).
14 MHz channel spacing is also available to support the STM–0 capacity.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
9681 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F.386 ANNEX 1
STM–1
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
fn=f0–281.95+29.65n
fn’=f0+29.37+29.65n
CS=29.65 DS=311.32
f0=8000
n : from 1 to 8
1 7747,70 1’ 8059,02
2 7777,35 2’ 8088,67
3 7807,00 3’ 8118,32
4 7836,65 4’ 8147,97
5 7866,30 5’ 8177,62
6 7895,95 6’ 8207,27
7 7925,60 7’ 8236,92
8 7955,25 8’ 8266,57
H (V)
2 4 6 8 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’
1 3 5 7 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’
V (H)
f0 = 8000
ED 03
514
9681 LSY Channel plan B: ITU–R F.386 ANNEX 3
5 8349 5’ 8468
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
3
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
8349 3’ 8468
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
6 8363 6’ 8482
STM–0
H (V)
2 4 6 2’ 4’ 6’
1 3 5 1’ 3’ 5’
V (H)
STM–1
H (V)
2 2i 2’ 2’i
1 1i 3 1’ 1’i 3’
V (H)
f0 = 8387.5
ED 03
514
9681 LSY Channel plan C: ITU–R F.386 ANNEX 4
STM–0 STM–1
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
fn=f0–259+14n fn=f0–259+28n
fn’=f0+7+14n fn’=f0+7+28n
CS=14 DS=266 CS=28 DS=266
f0=8157 f0=8157
n : from 1 to 16 n : from 1 to 8
3 7940 3’ 8206
2 7954 2’ 8220
4 7954 4’ 8220
5 7968 5’ 8234
3 7982 3’ 8248
6 7982 6’ 8248
7 7996 7’ 8262
4 8010 4’ 8276
8 8010 8’ 8276
9 8024 9’ 8290
5 8038 5’ 8304
10 8038 10’ 8304
ED 03
514
... Fig. 223. continues
STM–0
H (V)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’ 10’ 12’ 14’ 16’
7926 7954 7982 8010 8038 8066 8094 8122 8192 8220 8248 8276 8304 8332 8360 8388
f0 = 8157
STM–1
H (V)
2 4 6 8 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’
V (H) 1 3 5 7 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’
f0 = 8157
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
15 9610LSY
Label for
MAX
NAME ANV P/N Factory P/N Remote
Qty
Inventory
9610LSY TRANSCEIVER
N.B. Refer to para.para.3.7.2 thru’ 3.7.4 on pages 156 thru’ 161. for summary information on
transceiver composition and equipping notes
In Fig. 224. on page 454 the channel plan for the 9610LSY equipment to be used for the exploitation of
the 10.0 to 10.7 GHz band is shown.
This channel plan is completely defined by the CEPT–ERC 12–05 Recommendation and is based on a
frequency channel spacing of 28 MHz.
In case of simple transmission of a single STM–1 per RF frequency, the above channel plan allows the
use of a single or double polarized antenna up to a 7+1/8+0 system configuration.
9610LSY may work in the above plan by co–channel frequency re–use operation (CCDP) with the XPIC
unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM–1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF channel is
contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
9610 LSY Channel plan A: MEDIASET
CEPT–ERC 12–05
1 10028 1’ 10378
2 10056 2’ 10406
3 10084 3’ 10434
4 10112 4’ 10462
5 10140 5’ 10490
6 10168 6’ 10518
7 10196 7’ 10546
8 10224 8’ 10574
9 10252 9’ 10602
10028 10084 10140 10196 10252 10378 10434 10490 10546 10602
H (V)
2 4 6 8 10 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’ 10’
V (H) 1 3 5 7 9 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’ 9’
10056 10112 10168 10224 10280 10406 10462 10518 10574 10630
f0 = 10329
ED 03
514
16 9611LSY
Label for
MAX
NAME ANV P/N Factory P/N Remote
Qty
Inventory
9611LSY TRANSCEIVER
N.B. Refer to para.para.3.7.2 thru’ 3.7.4 on pages 156 thru’ 161. for summary information on
transceiver composition and equipping notes
In Fig. 225. on page 456 ( ITU–R F.387 rec. 1 ) and Fig. 226. on page 457 ( ITU–R F.387 ANNEX 2 ) the
two possible channel plans for the 9611LSY equipment to be used for the exploitation of the 10.7 to 11.7
GHz band are shown.
These channel plans are completely defined by the ITU–R Recommendation F.387 and are based on a
frequency channel spacing of 40 MHz.
In case of simple transmission of a single STM–1 per RF frequency, the above channel plans allow the
use of a single polarized antenna up to a 5+1/6+0 system configuration and of a double polarized antenna
up to a 7+1/8+0 system configuration for alternated channels.
9611LSY may work in the above plans by co–channel frequency re–use operation (CCDP) with the XPIC
unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM–1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF channel is
contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
9611 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F.387 rec. 1
1 10715 1’ 11245
2 10755 2’ 11285
3 10795 3’ 11325
4 10835 4’ 11365
5 10875 5’ 11405
6 10915 6’ 11445
7 10955 7’ 11485
8 10995 8’ 11525
9 11035 9’ 11565
10715 10795 10875 10955 11035 11115 11245 11325 11405 11485 11565 11645
H (V)
2 4 6 8 10 12 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’ 10’ 12’
V (H) 1 3 5 7 9 11 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’ 9’ 11’
10755 10835 10915 10995 11075 11155 11285 11365 11445 11525 11606 11685
f0 = 11200
ED 03
514
9611 LSY Channel plan B: ITU–R F.387 ANNEX 2
STM–1
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
CS=40; DS=490
fn=f0–505+40n
fn’=f0–15+40n
f0=11200
n : from 1 to 12
1 10735 1’
2 10775 2’ 11265
3 10815 3’ 11305
4 10855 4’ 11345
5 10895 5’ 11385
6 10935 6’ 11425
7 10975 7’ 11465
8 11015 8’ 11505
9 11055 9’ 11545
10735 10815 10895 10975 11055 11135 11225 11305 11385 11465 11545 11625
H (V)
2 4 6 8 10 12 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’ 10’ 12’
V (H) 1 3 5 7 9 11 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’ 9’ 11’
10775 10855 10935 11015 11095 11175 11265 11345 11425 11505 11585 11665
f0 = 11200
ED 03
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
458 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
17 9613LSY
Label for
MAX
NAME ANV P/N Factory P/N Remote
Qty
Inventory
9613LSY TRANSCEIVER
N.B. Refer to para.para.3.7.2 thru’ 3.7.4 on pages 156 thru’ 161. for summary information on
transceiver composition and equipping notes
In Fig. 227. on page 460 the channel plan for the 9613LSY equipment to be used for the exploitation of
the 13 GHz band is shown.
Channel plan is completely defined by the ITU–R Recommendation F.497.
9613LSY may work in the above plan by co–channel frequency re–use operation (CCDP) with the XPIC
unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM–1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF channel is
contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna.
ED 03
514
9613 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F.497 Rec.1
3 12786 3’ 13052
2 12793 2’ 13059
4 12800 4’ 13066
5 12814 5’ 13080
3 12821 3’ 13087
6 12828 6’ 13094
7 12842 7’ 13108
4 12849 4’ 13115
8 12856 8’ 13122
9 12870 9’ 13136
5 12877 5’ 13143
10 12884 10’ 13150
ED 03
514
... Fig. 227. continues
STM–0
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
12758 12786 12814 1284212870 12898 12926 12954 13024 13082 13080 1310813136 13164 13192 13220
H (V)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’ 10’ 12’ 14’ 16’
12772 12800 12828 1285612884 12912 12940 12968 13038 13066 13094 1312213150 13178 13206 13234
f0 = 12996
STM–1
H (V)
2 4 6 8 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’
V (H) 1 3 5 7 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’
f0 = 12996
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
462 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
Chapter 18 – Documentation Guide
SECTION CONTENT
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
483
465
PAGE
APPENDICES
463 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
464 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
18 DOCUMENTATION GUIDE
18.1 Introduction
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
This chapter contains all information regarding the Customer Documentation and is organized as follows:
• Typical contents of Technical & Craft Terminal Operator’s Handbooks on page 475
ED 03
514
18.2 Product–release–version handbook
This paragraph:
– and points out those the Operators should have, in order to carry out the required operations on the
9600LSY/LHR equipment configuration.
Please refer to following para.18.3 on page 472 for a general description of Alcatel Customer
Documentation system.
The list of handbooks given here below is valid as at the issue date of this Handbook and
can be changed without any obligation for ALCATEL to update it in this Handbook.
Some of the handbooks listed here below may not be available as at the issue date of this
Handbook.
The 9600LSY system can be supplied in the basic configurations (LHR, LHRC and WMSN) introduced
in para.2.2.3 on page 41.
In para.18.2.1, starting herebelow, the documentation set specific for 9600LSY subsystem types (LHR and
LHRC) is described.
In para.18.2.2 on page 471, the documentation sets specific for associated subsystems types (OPTINEX
rack and 1650SM–C) are described.
The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the 9600LSY Rel.1.0 & Rel.2.0
system is modularly composed by different handbooks, each of which can be applied to a specific
version/configuration or to various versions/configurations.
Tab. 77. on page 467 lists the handbooks and indicates their use according to the versions/configurations
stated above.
The [REF] indication in Tab. 77. is relevant to the handbook brief description given in tables Tab. 78. thru’
Tab. 83. in the following.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
Tab. 77. Handbooks usage according to System configuration
USAGE
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
ED 03
514
The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the equipment whose
product-release-version is stated in para.1.2 on page 21 consists of the following handbooks:
9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0
3DB 02839 BAAA 955.203.293 R
Technical Handbook
Tab. 79. Handbooks related to the specific product SWP management and local product control
THIS
FACTORY
REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No. HDBK
Part No.
or NOTE
9600LSY Rel.1.0
3DB 02838 AAAA 957.207.022 A
CT Operator’s Handbook SWP 1.0
To be used with:
[C] – SWP REG.9600LSY R.1.0
in association with LHR configuration only.
Provides 9600LSY/LHR screens and operational procedures for Equipment SW
management and maintenance.
9600LSY Rel.2.0
3DB 02838 BAAA 957.207.023 B
CT Operator’s Handbook SWP 2.0
To be used with:
[D] – SWP REG.9600LSY R.2.0
in association with both LHR and LHRC configurations.
Provides 9600LSY/LHR/LHRC screens and operational procedures for Equipment
SW management and maintenance.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
Tab. 80. Installation and Line–Up Handbooks related to the specific configuration
• The Installation Handbook provides information regarding Equipment installation, according to
Alcatel Installation Engineering Dept. rules.
• The Line–up Guide provides information regarding equipment line up, according to Alcatel
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0
3DB 02840 BAAA 955.203.303
Installation Handbook
[G]
To be used in the 9600LSY LHRC Regenerator configurations.
9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0
3DB 02841 BAAA 955.203.313
Line Up guide
[H]
To be used in the 9600LSY LHRC Regenerator configurations.
THIS
FACTORY
REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No. HDBK
Part No.
or NOTE
[I] Describes the measurement procedure for the interference searching in the various
RF bands used by Alcatel Radio Transmission products.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
Tab. 82. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform
1320CT
3AL 79186 AAAA 957.130.542 E
Basic Operator’s Handbook
[J]
Provides general information and operational procedures common to all 1320CT
(Craft terminal) of Alcatel InfoModel Network Elements.
1330AS Rel.5.0
3AL 71079 AAAA 957.130.442 A
Operator’s Handbook
[K]
Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the alarm
Surveillance software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
[L] Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the Event Log
Management software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
ED 03
514
18.2.2 Related equipment handbooks and CD–ROMs
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
FACTORY
REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No.
Part No.
[N] Optinex Racks Rel.3.0.0 Technical Handbook 3AL 37953 AAAA 955.100.922 C
– Technical Handbook
– Installation Handbook
– Commissioning Handbook
– CT Operator’s Handbook
– CD–ROM containing the above cited handbooks.
Their P/Ns are not indicated here, as they depend on the Product release and Software Package version.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
18.3 General on Alcatel Customer Documentation
This paragraph describes in general the Alcatel Customer Documentation system, details the association
between the product levels and the associated documentation, and explains Customer Documentation
The documentation typical contents described in para.18.3.3 on page 475, apply to handbooks issued
after February 2002.
a) Definition
Standard system, hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel
the possibility and the information necessary for installing, commissioning, operating, and
maintaining the equipment according to Alcatel Laboratory design and Installation Dept. choices. In
particular:
• the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on the explanation
of the man–machine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it;
N.B. No supply to Customers of design documentation (like PCB hardware design and
production documents and files, software source programs, programming tools, etc.) is
envisaged.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
18.3.2 Product levels and associated Customer Documentation
a) Products
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
A ”product” is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole
of performances and services that it is meant for.
E.g. 9600USY is a product (STM–1/0 Urban Digital Radio Link).
b) Product-releases
A ”product” evolves through successive ”product-releases”, which are the real products marketed
for their delivery at a certain ”product-release” availability date. A certain ”product-release” performs
more functionalities than the previous one.
E.g. 9600USY Rel.1.0 and 9600USY Rel.2.0 are two successive ”product-releases” of the same
”product”.
A ”product–release” comprehends a set of hardware components and at least one “Software
Package” (SWP); as a whole, they identify the possible network applications and the equipment
performances that the specific ”product-release” has been designed, engineered, and marketed for.
SWP version
SWP Release
1. 0. 7
SWP evolution for bug fixing purposes
(same SWP Release within same Product–Release) 1. 0. 9
1. 0. 7
SWP evolution for additional features
(new SWP Release of a new Product–Release) 2. 0. 2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
N.B. Sometimes, different SWP Releases (within the same Product–Release) are commercially
distinguished by different names, e.g. :
e) Customer Documentation
• Software documentation:
– a Craft Terminal Operator’s Handbook, associated to the specific SWP–Release (see
page 476 for details)
– other Operator’s Handbooks (typically those associated to the SW platform embedded
in the SWP)
PRODUCT
evolution
PRODUCT–RELEASE 1.0 PRODUCT–RELEASE 2.0
ALTERNATIVE CONFIGURATIONS
CONFIG.A CONFIG.B
evolution
PRODUCT SWP REL.1.0 SWP REL.1.1
LEVELS
DOCUMENTATION
ED 03
514
18.3.3 Typical contents of Technical & Craft Terminal Operator’s Handbooks
a) Technical Handbook
It is usually composed by a ’main handbook’ and ’enclosed documents’. Information is divided into
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
MAIN HANDBOOK:
• GENERAL INFORMATION
• INFORMATIVE LEVEL
• OPERATIVE LEVEL
– Station Layouts : lists and describes the most common of all the available system
configurations envisaged for the specific configuration the handbook is meant for. For
each configuration a station layout (with cable interconnection diagram) and a simple
system block diagram are present.
– Hardware Setting Documentation & Annexes : lists the enclosed documents having
P/N different from that of the handbook (they can be used also as annexes to other
handbooks) and describes how to use the Hardware Setting Documents enclosed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS : Hardware Setting Documents and other documents for specific
purposes (typical examples: ODU repair procedures, branching detailed configurations and
drawings, etc.)
ED 03
514
b) Craft Terminal Operator’s Handbook
It is usually composed by various sections. Each section is an independent document that can evolve
independently from the others. The sections always present are:
– SWP description : lists and describes the Software Packages the Handbook refers to.
– Installation : describes in detail the operations necessary for the SWP installation and
upgrading (ECT parts and equipment parts).
• SECTION 2: NE MANAGEMENT : gives the description of the menu structure and of all the NE
functionalities available in the Craft Terminal. This section is organized in several chapters
grouped according to the following general scheme:
– General information
– Software management
Depending on the SWP contents, other sections can be present in the handbook, to describe other
specific applications or features.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
18.3.4 Documentation on paper
a) Handbook format
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
Handbooks are supplied on A4–sized papers for text and general drawings, and, when necessary,
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
b) Handbook languages
With regard to Operator’s Handbooks containing screen prints of the software applications, the
screens included are in the language envisaged by the applicative software supplied to the Customer
(e.g. an Operator’s Handbook translated in Russian has the screens in English if the user interface
is not in Russian).
Engineering documentation (like selected sheets of unit schematics and component lay–out given
only as hardware presetting documentation) is bilingual Italian–English.
c) Handbook identification
• the name of the ”configuration”, if more than one is envisaged within the ”product-release”,
• the first two digits of the ”SWP–version” as far as Operator’s Handbook is concerned,
• the handbook issue date. The date on the handbook does not refer to the date of printing, but
to the date on which the handbook source file has been completed and released for production.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
d) Handbook updating
The documentation is maintained updated according to the technical changes of the product it refers
to, provided that these technical changes does really impact Customer Documentation (e.g.:
– the sections/chapters modified with respect to the previous edition are listed in a suitable
Handbook History Table in the Handbook Guide section;
– a specific note in the same section sums–up the reasons for the change;
– in the affected chapters, revision bars on the left of the page indicate modifications in text
and drawings (this is done after the first officially released and validated version).
A new product-release changes the handbook P/N and the edition starts from 01. In this case,
the modified parts of the handbook are not listed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
18.3.5 Documentation on CD–ROM
a) Contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
b) Standards
c) CD–ROM identification
1) by the following external identifiers, that are printed both on the booklet and the CD–ROM upper
surface:
– the name of the ”product–release”,
– a writing indicating the language(s),
– the CD–ROM P/N (Factory P/N and ANV P/N),
– the CD–ROM edition (first edition=01)
2) and, internally, by the list of the source handbooks and documents (P/Ns and editions) by whose
collection and processing the CD–ROM itself has been created.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
d) CD–ROM updating
This causes the planning and creation of a new edition of the CD–ROM.
Updating of CD–ROMs always follows, with a certain delay, the updating of the single handbooks
composing the collection.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
18.3.6 Handbook and CD–ROM supply to Customers
a) Standard supply
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
Handbooks and CD–ROMs are standard commercial items and are ordered and delivered as any
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
b) Product–documentation consistency
Equipment description and lay–out are always general, i.e. they never describe the actual
composition of the equipment supplied to Customer (this task is entrusted to plant–dependent
documentation).
Detailed hardware documentation concerns actually supplied units and is coherent with the
production issue of such units.
Software–associated handbooks are coherent with the supplied SWP release.
Copies of the handbooks regarding a specific product–release previously delivered can be required
specifying P/N and edition.
c) In–advance supply
Whenever handbooks or CD–ROMs are delivered before the relevant equipment delivery, there is
the risk that their contents might not agree with the characteristics of the equipment which will be
delivered: the more they are in advance the less are they likely to agree.
Supplying updated handbooks or CD–ROMs to Customers who have already received previous
issues is subject to commercial criteria.
By updated handbook delivery, we mean the supply of a complete copy of a new issue of the
handbook (supplying errata–corrige sheets is not envisaged).
e) Copyright notification
The technical information of the handbooks and CD–ROMs supplied to Customers is the property
of ALCATEL and must not be copied, reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
ED 03
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
482 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
19 SAFETY–EMC–ESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING
19.1 Introduction
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
This chapter describes the equipment labelling and the norms mandatory or suggested (see also point
3 ) on page 16) that must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment.
The stated norms apply both to the operations described in this manual and to those described in the
related manuals listed in para.18.2 on page 466.
ED 03
514
19.3 Safety Rules
– Installation
– Line–Up or Commissioning
– When equipment is operating nobody is allowed to have access inside on the equipment
parts which are protected with Cover Plate Shields removable with tools
– In case of absolute need to have access inside, on the equipment parts when it is operating
this is allowed exclusively to service personnel, where for Service Personnel or Technical
assistance is meant :
The Service Personnel can only replace the faulty units with spare parts.
The Service Personnel is not allowed to repair: hence the access to the parts no specified
is not permitted.
The keys and/or the tools used to open doors, hinged covers to remove parts which give
access to compartments in which are present high dangerous voltages must belong
exclusively to the service personnel.
– For the eventual cleaning of the external parts of the equipment, absolutely do not use any
inflammable substance or substances which in some way may alter the markings,
inscriptions etc.
• The Safety Rules stated in the handbook describe the operations and/or precautions to observe
to safeguard service personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety,
i.e., not exposing persons, animals, things to the risk of being injured/damaged.
• Whenever the safety protection features have been impaired, REMOVE POWER.
To cut off power proceed to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station
upstream (rack or station distribution frame).
• The safety rules described in this handbook are distinguished by the following symbol and
statement:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
SAFETY RULES
ED 03
514
19.3.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command
It is of utmost importance to follow the instructions printed on the labels affixed to the units and assemblies.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
The labels are fully compliant with International Norms ISO 3846–1984. The symbols or statements are
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
CONTAINS A SYMBOL
INDICATES WARNING OR DANGER (YELLOW
BACKGROUND–BLACK SYMBOL AND RIM)
The labels have been affixed to indicate a dangerous condition. They may contain any standard–known
symbol or any statement necessary to safeguard users and service personnel against the most common
ones, specifically:
• risk of explosion
• microwave radiations
Pay attention to the information stated in the following, and proceed as instructed
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
The symbols presented in para.19.3.3 through 19.3.8 are all the possible symbols that
could be present on Alcatel equipment, but are not all necessarily present on the
equipment this handbook refers to.
The following warning label is affixed next to dangerous voltages (>42.4 Vp; >60 Vdc).
If it is a Class 1 equipment connected to mains, then the label associated to it will state that the equipment
will have to be grounded before connecting it to the power supply voltage, e.g.:
WARNING !
Ground protect the equipment before
connecting it to manins
Make sure that power has been cut off
before disconnecting ground protection.
a) Personal injury can be caused by –48 V dc (or by 220 V ac if envisaged in the equipment). Avoid
touching powered terminals with any exposed part of your body.
b) Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in
burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with
primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
19.3.4 Harmful Optical Signals
If the assembly or unit is fitted with a LASER, the labels must comply with the IEC 60825–1 and –2
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
International Norms.
If the assembly or unit is fitted with a LASER, the labels must comply with the IEC 825–1–1993
International Norms.
The symbol indicates the presence of a LASER beam. Danger level is stated within a rectangular label:
If the LASER is a class 1 product, the label depicting the symbol within a triangle is not compulsory.
The rectangular shaped label bears all the information needed, i.e.:
• LASER class
• Power emitted
• Wave length
• Ref. Norm
• Precautionary measures taken depend on LASER class
• Indications given on openings, panels and safety interlockers
LASER RADIATION
CAUTION DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW
LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW CLASS 3A LASER PRODUCT
DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS P.MAX=31m...... =1300mm. IEC 825 1993
ED 03
514
19.3.4.2 Optical safety: general rules
On handling optical equipments or units or cables always check that laser labels are properly affixed and
that the system complies with applicable optical standards.
a) Laser radiation is not visible by the naked eye or with laser safety glasses. Although it cannot be seen,
laser radiation may be present.
b) Never look directly into an unterminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable,
unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.
c) Never look at an optical fiber splice, cable or connector, unless it is absolutely known that no laser
radiation is present.
d) All optical connectors, terminating either fibers and transmitters/receivers, are provided with
protective covers that must always be used, as soon as possible, when any optical link is
disconnected for installation/test/maintenance purposes or whatever operation.
e) Never look directly into an unterminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable by
means of magnifiers/microscopes, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present. A
magnifier/microscope greatly increases the damage hazard to the eyes.
f) Never point an unterminated optical fiber splice, cable or connector to other persons, unless it is
absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.
g) Always remove electrical power from near and far optical transmitters before disconnecting optical
links between the transmitter and the receiver.
h) Wearing of laser safety goggles or eyes shields is recommended for every person working on optical
devices, whenever the above listed rules cannot be followed.
ED 03
514
19.3.5 Risks of Explosions
This risk is present when batteries are used, and it is signalled by the following label:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Therefore, slits or apertures are made to let air circulate freely and allow dangerous gasses to down flow
(battery–emitted hydrogen). A 417–IEC–5641 Norm. compliant label is affixed next to it indicating that the
openings must not be covered up.
The following warning label is affixed next to fans or other moving mechanical parts:
Before carrying out any maintenance operation see that all the moving mechanical parts have been
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
stopped.
ED 03
514
19.3.7 Heat–radiating Mechanical Parts
As stated by IEC 950 Norm., para.1.4.7 the touchable mechanical parts are those whose temperature T
exceeds the limits established by the following formula (temperatures in °C ):
a) Personal injury can be caused by heat. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of
your body.
ED 03
514
19.3.8 Microwave radiations
Microwave radiations can endanger your health. Ensure the transmitters are switched OFF before
working close to and in front of the antennas.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
No dangerous level of microwave radiations exists outside the antenna feeder. Nevertheless, body should
not be exposed to the radiation in front of the antenna ( < 0.5 m ) for a long time ( > 6 minutes ).
ED 03
514
19.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms)
The equipment’s EMC norms depend on the type of installation being carried out (cable termination,
grounding etc.,) and on the operating conditions (equipment, setting options of the electrical/electronic
– Installation,
– Line–Up or Commissioning
• The norms set down to guarantee EMC compatibility, are distinguished inside this handbook
by the symbol and term:
• All connections (towards the external source of the equipment) made with shielded cables use
only cables and connectors suggested in this technical handbook or in the relevant Plant
Documentation, or those specified in the Customer’s”Installation Norms.” (or similar
documents)
• Ground connect the equipment utilizing a conductor with proper dia. and impedance
• Mount shields (if utilized), previously positioned during the installation phase, but not before
having cleaned and decrease it.
• Before inserting the shielded unit proceed to clean and decrease all peripheral surfaces
(contact springs and connection points, etc.)
ED 03
514
19.4.2 EMC General Norms – Turn–on, Tests & Operation
• Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields properly positioned (dummy covers,
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
• Before inserting the shielded unit, which will replace the faulty or modified unit, proceed to clean
and decrease all peripheral surfaces (contact springs and connection points, etc.)
ED 03
514
19.5 Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges
Before removing the ESD protections from the monitors, connectors etc., observe the precautionary
measures stated. Make sure that the ESD protections have been replaced and after having terminated
Observe the precautionary measures stated when having to touch the electronic parts during the
installation/maintenance phases.
• a coiled cord connected to the elasticized band and to the stud on the subrack.
ELASTICIZED BAND
COILED CORD
Suggestion or note....
Cautions to avoid possible equipment damage are marked by the following symbol:
TITLE...
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
19.7 Labels affixed to the Equipment
This paragraph indicates the positions and the information contained on the identification and serial
labels affixed to the equipment, with the exception of those already mentioned in para.19.3.2 (page 485)
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
LABEL POSITION
ALCATEL
9662 LSY 12345 !
Alcatel Logo
ALCATEL
ED 03
514
19.7.2 General use labels
Fig. 232. thru’ Fig. 237. illustrate the most common positions of the labels on the units, modules and
subracks.
The table below relates the ref. numbers stated on the figures to the labels used.
Labelling depicted hereafter is for indicative purposes and could be changed without any notice.
Standard labels can be affixed to any position on the equipment, as required by the Customer.
However, for each of the above are applied the rules defined by each individual Customer.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
4
03
955.203.292 Q
Fig. 232. Large–subrack labels
2
ABCD
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Tab. 87. on page 496
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
497 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
7
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
6
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Tab. 87. on page 496.
498 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
ABC
xxxxxx
xxxxxx
xxxxxxxxx
2
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Tab. 87. on page 496
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
3
499 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
ABC
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Tab. 87. on page 496.
2
500 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
NB.1
1
ABC
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Tab. 87. on page 496
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
NB.1
ABC
NB. 1 = The label is present on p.c.s. components side or rear side on the empty spaces.
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Tab. 87. on page 496
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
FACTORY P/N + CS
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 238. Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
ACRONYM
Fig. 239. Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
ED 03
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
504 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
SECTION CONTENT
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
507
PAGE
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES
505 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
506 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
20 HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES
20.1 Introduction
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
This chapter contains the documents sheets to refer to for unit/sub–unit hardware setting options.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
The list of the enclosed documents is given in Tab. 90. on page 511, according to the ANV part number.
Other enclosed documents are listed in Tab. 91. on page 513.
NOTE The last two ANV-P/N letters (in the following stated as ’suffix’) stand for a ”feasible
alternative”, they might differentiate two units even though still functionally
compatible. For this reason the indicated ANV P/N does not include the last two
letters.
For example : the units having P/Ns ”3AL–34065–AAAA” and ”3AL–34065–AABA”
are functionally compatible and, as regards to hardware settings, the MSxxx
document (described hereafter) 3AL–34065–AAAA-MSxxx is applicable for both.
The following table shows an example of correspondence between ”FACTORY P/N + CS” and
”ANV P/N + ICS”
N.B. The P/Ns used in this example have no correspondence with those of the actual equipment part
list!
In this example you can see that the production series is identified only by the CS as far as the
Factory code is concerned, and by the ’suffix + ICS’ if the ANV code is referred to.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Some of the possible positions of the label indicating the unit’s P/Ns and CS–ICS are illustrated
in section HANDBOOK GUIDE.
ED 03
514
– CROSS–REFERENCE
• Tab. 89. on page 510 lists the units having HW setting options and, for each of them, indicates
the documents to be used, that are listed in Tab. 90. on page 511.
– ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS
For each type of unit or sub-unit having customizable setting options, the document
”ANV P/N”–MSxxx
is annexed to this handbook.
The MSxxx documents are enclosed in the ANV P/N order. The Edition of the enclosed MSxxx
document is the highest available at the date on which the Technical Handbook is assembled, or the
CD–ROM containing it is burned.
– one or more tables defining the relationship between the functions achievable and the
setting options to make;
– the unit layout drawing which shows the exact location of all the setting options.
N.B. To make ”TC” Hardware Settings (when necessary) remove the protective
cover plate present on the rear side of the board and replace it at the end of the
operation
The setting options described in the documents MSxxx must be used according to
3AL377470001 (962.000.022 F) MSxxx document, inserted in Tab. 90. on page 511, which
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
514
EXAMPLE
N.B. The P/Ns used in this example have no correspondence with those of the actual equipment part
list!
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Taking into account the same unit of Tab. 88. on page 507:
and supposing that the setting options valid for CS=01 are equal to those for CS=02, but change
for CS=03, the table at the beginning of the document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ will be:
1 01 ––AA 01
2 03 ––AC 01
ED 03
514
20.3 List of enclosed documents
• Tab. 90. on page 511 lists the documents enclosed to the handbook, sorted according to ANV
P/N.
Information for the use of HW setting documents is given in para.20.2 on page 507.
ED 03
514
UNIT ANV P/N Documents to use
UNIT NAME (column Id in Tab. 90. on
(Factory P/N) page 511)
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
The edition of the documents (listed in this table) that are physically enclosed in the
handbook is the highest available when this handbook is assembled. The edition of
enclosed documents is not specified in this table.
ED 03
514
UNIT ANV P/N
Id UNIT NAME Enclosed Document
(Factory P/N)
ED 03
514
20.3.2 Other documents (Annexes)
Tab. 91. herebelow lists other documents enclosed to this handbook. Their use is explained in other parts
of the handbook.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
The edition of the documents (listed in this table) that are physically enclosed in the handbook is
the highest available when this handbook is assembled. The edition of enclosed documents is
not specified in this table.
[6] 8BW 04007 0006 MSZZQ Branching 9611/13 LSY XPOL (N.B.)
ED 03
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
END OF DOCUMENT
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
514 / 514
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
UNIT HW PRESETTING – PREDISP.HW UNITA
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
MICROSWITCHES
ON POSITION
ED 01
3
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI
The table present in the ”Table of contents” indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
La tabella presente nell’indice (”Table of contents”) indica la prima e le due più recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
1 ––01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
3
1 FROM - DA CS= UNMEANINGFUL – NON SIGNIFICATIVO
ED 01
3
UNIT HW PRESETTING – PREDISP.HW UNITA
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
ESCONX
ED 01
4
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI
The table present in the ”Table of contents” indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
La tabella presente nell’indice (”Table of contents”) indica la prima e le due più recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
1 03 ––AA 03
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
1 FROM - DA CS=01
ED 01
4
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni
ED 01
4
UNIT HW PRESETTING – PREDISP.HW UNITA’
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
ESCON–WTD
ED 01
4
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI
The table present in the ”Table of contents” indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
La tabella presente nell’indice (”Table of contents”) indica la prima e le due più recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
1 01 ––AA 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
1 FROM - DA CS=01
ED 01
4
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni
ED 01
4
UNIT HW PRESETTING – PREDISP.HW UNITA’
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1 FROM - DA CS=03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
5.9–6.4 GHZ
TRANSCEIVER
128 QAM
ED 02
6
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI
The table present in the ”Table of contents” indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
La tabella presente nell’indice (”Table of contents”) indica la prima e le due più recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
1 03 ––AA 03
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
6
1 FROM - DA CS=03
Utilizzare il documento :
Use the document :
ED 02
6
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: ’P/N’ ECZZQ ED.01
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
ED 02
6
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
411.200.518 MSZZQ
6
3DB 01264 AAAA MSZZQ
5/ 6
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
411.200.518 MSZZQ
6
END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1 FROM - DA CS=03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
6.4–7.1 GHZ
TRANSCEIVER
128 QAM
ED 02
6
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI
The table present in the ”Table of contents” indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
La tabella presente nell’indice (”Table of contents”) indica la prima e le due più recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
1 03 ––AA 03
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
6
1 FROM - DA CS=03
Utilizzare il documento :
Use the document :
ED 02
6
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: ’P/N’ ECZZQ ED.01
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
ED 02
6
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
411.200.519 MSZZQ
6
3DB 01265 AAAA MSZZQ
5/ 6
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
411.200.519 MSZZQ
6
END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1 FROM - DA CS=03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
MODEM LH STM1–1WST
ED 01
7
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI
The table present in the ”Table of contents” indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
La tabella presente nell’indice (”Table of contents”) indica la prima e le due più recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
1 03 ––AA 03
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
7
1 FROM - DA CS=03
ED 01
7
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
487.210.560 MSZZQ
REAR SIDE VIEW – VISTA LATO RETRO
7
3DB 02134 AAAA MSZZQ
4/ 7
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: ’P/N’ EJZZQ ED.03
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
R. S. PONTIC.–SWITCH
Strap–Switch
FUNZIONAMENTO – Operation Schm.
Ref CHIUSI APERTI
Closed Open
CANC I1–1 X
COMB I1–1 X
ED 01
7
R. S. PONTIC.–SWITCH
Strap–Switch
FUNZIONAMENTO – Operation Schm.
CHIUSI APERTI
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
DI USO INTERNO
* I2–3 X
Factory use only
DI USO INTERNO * I3 X
Factory use only
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
7
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
487.210.560 MSZZQ
7
END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
MODEM LH STM0–0WST
ED 01
6
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI
The table present in the ”Table of contents” indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
La tabella presente nell’indice (”Table of contents”) indica la prima e le due più recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
1 01 ––AA 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
6
1 FROM - DA CS=01
ED 01
6
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
487.210.561 MSZZQ
REAR SIDE VIEW – VISTA LATO RETRO
6
3DB 02138 AAAA MSZZQ
4/ 6
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: ’P/N’ EJZZQ ED.03
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
ED 01
6
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
487.210.561 MSZZQ
6
END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1 FROM - DA CS=02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SMA
ED 01
4
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI
The table present in the ”Table of contents” indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
La tabella presente nell’indice (”Table of contents”) indica la prima e le due più recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
1 02 ––AA 02
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
1 FROM - DA CS=02
ED 01
4
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: ’P/N’ EJZZQ ED.03
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
R. S. PONTIC.–SWITCH
Strap–Switch
FUNZIONAMENTO – Operation Schm.
Ref CHIUSI APERTI
Closed Open
DI USO INTERNO I1–1 X
Factory use only
DI USO INTERNO
I1–2 X
Factory use only
DI USO INTERNO
I1–4 X
Factory use only
DI USO INTERNO I2
Factory use only
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
UNIT HW PRESETTING – PREDISP.HW UNITA’
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1 FROM - DA CS=02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
ESC
ED 01
7
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI
The table present in the ”Table of contents” indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
La tabella presente nell’indice (”Table of contents”) indica la prima e le due più recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
1 02 ––AA 02
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
7
1 FROM - DA CS=02
ED 01
7
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
487.210.566 MSZZQ
REAR SIDE VIEW – VISTA LATO RETRO
7
3DB 02160 AAAA MSZZQ
4/ 7
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: ’P/N’ EJZZQ ED.03
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
R. S. PONTIC.–SWITCH
Strap–Switch
FUNZIONAMENTO – Operation Schm.
Ref CHIUSI APERTI
Closed Open
DI USO INTERNO I2
Factory use only
DI USO INTERNO I3
Factory use only
ED 01
7
R. S. PONTIC.–SWITCH
Strap–Switch
FUNZIONAMENTO – Operation Schm.
CHIUSI APERTI
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
ED 01
7
R. S. PONTIC.–SWITCH
Strap–Switch
FUNZIONAMENTO – Operation Schm.
CHIUSI APERTI
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
ED 01
7
UNIT HW PRESETTING – PREDISP.HW UNITA’
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3.6–4.2 GHZ
TRANSCEIVER
128 QAM
ED 02
6
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI
The table present in the ”Table of contents” indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
La tabella presente nell’indice (”Table of contents”) indica la prima e le due più recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
1 01 ––AA 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
6
1 FROM - DA CS=01
Utilizzare il documento :
Use the document :
ED 02
6
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: ’P/N’ ECZZQ ED.01
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
ED 02
6
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
411.200.543 MSZZQ
6
3DB 02524 AAAA MSZZQ
5/ 6
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
411.200.543 MSZZQ
6
END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
4,4–5,0 GHZ
TRANSCEIVER
128 QAM
ED 01
6
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI
The table present in the ”Table of contents” indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
La tabella presente nell’indice (”Table of contents”) indica la prima e le due più recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
1 01 ––AA 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
6
1 FROM - DA CS=01
Utilizzare il documento :
Use the document :
ED 01
6
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: ’P/N’ ECZZQ ED.01
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
ED 01
6
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
411.200.545 MSZZQ
6
3DB 02526 AAAA MSZZQ
5/ 6
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
411.200.545 MSZZQ
6
END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
7.1–7.7 GHZ
TRANSCEIVER
128 QAM
ED 02
6
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI
The table present in the ”Table of contents” indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
La tabella presente nell’indice (”Table of contents”) indica la prima e le due più recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
1 01 ––AA 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
6
1 FROM - DA CS=01
Utilizzare il documento :
Use the document :
ED 02
6
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: ’P/N’ ECZZQ ED.01
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
ED 02
6
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
411.200.547 MSZZQ
6
3DB 02531 AAAA MSZZQ
5/ 6
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
411.200.547 MSZZQ
6
END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1 FROM - DA CS=02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
7.7–8.3 GHZ
TRANSCEIVER
128 QAM
ED 02
6
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI
The table present in the ”Table of contents” indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
La tabella presente nell’indice (”Table of contents”) indica la prima e le due più recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
1 02 ––AA 02
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
6
1 FROM - DA CS=02
Utilizzare il documento :
Use the document :
ED 02
6
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: ’P/N’ ECZZQ ED.01
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
ED 02
6
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
411.200.548 MSZZQ
6
3DB 02532 AAAA MSZZQ
5/ 6
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
411.200.548 MSZZQ
6
END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1 FROM - DA CS=02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
12,7–13,2 GHZ
TRANSCEIVER
128 QAM
ED 01
6
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI
The table present in the ”Table of contents” indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
La tabella presente nell’indice (”Table of contents”) indica la prima e le due più recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
1 02 ––AA 02
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
6
1 FROM - DA CS=02
Utilizzare il documento :
Use the document :
ED 01
6
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: ’P/N’ ECZZQ ED.01
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
ED 01
6
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
411.200.554 MSZZQ
6
3DB 02890 AAAA MSZZQ
5/ 6
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
411.200.554 MSZZQ
6
END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1 FROM - DA CS=02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
10,7–11,7 GHZ
TRANSCEIVER
128 QAM
ED 01
6
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI
The table present in the ”Table of contents” indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
La tabella presente nell’indice (”Table of contents”) indica la prima e le due più recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
1 02 ––AA 02
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
6
1 FROM - DA CS=02
Utilizzare il documento :
Use the document :
ED 01
6
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: ’P/N’ ECZZQ ED.01
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
ED 01
6
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
411.200.555 MSZZQ
6
3DB 02900 AAAA MSZZQ
5/ 6
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
411.200.555 MSZZQ
6
END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1 FROM - DA CS=03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
RT CONTROL
ED 01
4
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI
The table present in the ”Table of contents” indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
La tabella presente nell’indice (”Table of contents”) indica la prima e le due più recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
1 03 ––AA 03
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
1 FROM - DA CS=03
TC : Straps with solder drop (where not stated, factory use only)
TC : Ponticelli a goccia di stagno (Ove non specificato, di solo uso interno)
ED 01
4
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni
For the dip–switch “I2–I3–I5” meaning, use the specific Tranceiver’s MSZZQ document.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Per il significato dei dip–switch “I2–I3–I5” utilizzare il documento MSZZQ dello specifico
Ricetrasmettitore.
ED 01
4
UNIT HW PRESETTING – PREDISP.HW UNITA’
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
ESC
ED 01
6
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI
The table present in the ”Table of contents” indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
La tabella presente nell’indice (”Table of contents”) indica la prima e le due più recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
1 01 ––AA 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
6
1 FROM - DA CS=01
ED 01
6
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
487.210.816 MSZZQ
REAR SIDE VIEW – VISTA LATO RETRO
6
3DB 03341 AAAA MSZZQ
4/ 6
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: ’P/N’ EJZZQ ED.01
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
ED 01
6
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
487.210.816 MSZZQ
6
END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SMA
ED 01
4
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI
The table present in the ”Table of contents” indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
La tabella presente nell’indice (”Table of contents”) indica la prima e le due più recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
1 01 ––AA 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
1 FROM - DA CS=01
ED 01
4
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: ’P/N’ EJZZQ ED.01
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
R. S. PONTIC.–SWITCH
Strap–Switch
FUNZIONAMENTO – Operation Schm.
Ref CHIUSI APERTI
Closed Open
DI USO INTERNO I1–1 X
Factory use only
DI USO INTERNO
I1–2 X
Factory use only
DI USO INTERNO
I1–4 X
Factory use only
DI USO INTERNO I2
Factory use only
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
UNIT HW PRESETTING – PREDISP.HW UNITA’
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
10,0–10,7 GHZ
TRANSCEIVER
128 QAM
ED 01
6
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI
The table present in the ”Table of contents” indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
La tabella presente nell’indice (”Table of contents”) indica la prima e le due più recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
1 01 ––AA 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
6
1 FROM - DA CS=01
Utilizzare il documento :
Use the document :
ED 01
6
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: ’P/N’ ECZZQ ED.01
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
ED 01
6
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
411.200.588 MSZZQ
6
3DB 04131 AAAA MSZZQ
5/ 6
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
411.200.588 MSZZQ
6
END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
8,2–8,5 GHZ
TRANSCEIVER
128 QAM
ED 01
6
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI
The table present in the ”Table of contents” indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
La tabella presente nell’indice (”Table of contents”) indica la prima e le due più recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
1 01 ––AA 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
6
1 FROM - DA CS=01
Utilizzare il documento :
Use the document :
ED 01
6
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni
FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: ’P/N’ ECZZQ ED.01
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
ED 01
6
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
411.200.589 MSZZQ
6
3DB 04243 AAAA MSZZQ
5/ 6
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
411.200.589 MSZZQ
6
END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO
Alcatel 9600LSY
STM–1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System
LHR version
When supplied on paper, this handbook and the annexed documents are divided by registers, for an easier
access to the information herein contained:
CONTENTS REGISTER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES
HANDBOOK GUIDE 1
DESCRIPTIONS 2
HANDBOOK MAINTENANCE 3
FREQUENCY PLANS & PART NUMBERS 4
APPENDICES 5
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES 6
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTS (MSZZQ) 7
Branching 9640/47 LSY 8
Branching 9640/47 LSY XPOL 9
ENCLOSED
DOCUMENTS
Branching 9662/67/74/81 LSY 10
Branching 9662/67/74/81 LSY XPOL 11
Branching 9610/11/13 LSY 12
Branching 9610/11/13 LSY XPOL 13
No pagine numerate
fase
(facciate) numbered
step
No pages da from a to
1 TARGHETTE - LABELS
2 FRONTESPIZIO - FRONT 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3 1/514 14/514
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES
CONTINUA – CONTINUES
ED 03 RELEASED
6
QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE
THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK
No pagine numerate
fase
(facciate) numbered
step
No pages da from a to
ED 03 RELEASED
6
QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE
THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
CONTINUA – CONTINUES
• The documents MSZZQ are archived in PDAS individually (ALICE 6.10 ARCHIVED BY GAPI
3.9.1 + PDF); get the highest edition. The pdf files can be directly retrieved from intranet WTD
web site.
• PDF file retrieved from PD1 must be opened with ACROBAT Reader Version 4.0 at least.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03 RELEASED
6
QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE
THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK
Domain :
Division :
Rubric :
Type : 9600LSY/LHR REL.1.0/2.0 TECHNICAL HDBK
Distribution Codes Internal : External :
Approvals
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AAAA
Ed.03
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0
STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System
LHR version
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03 RELEASED
6
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0
STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
LHR version
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
VOL.1/1
LHR version
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
955.203.292 Q Ed.03 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.03
VOL.1/1
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0
STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System
LHR version
955.203.292 Q Ed.03 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.03 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK VOL.1/1
LHR version
ED 03 RELEASED
6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
RELEASED
955.203.292 TQZZA
6
3DB 02839 AAAA TQZZA
Y
FINE DEL DOCUMENTO INTERNO – END OF INTERNAL DOCUMENT
6/ 6
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
NOTES ON NAVIGATION AND PRINTING
NAVIGATION
THIS FILE CONTAINS SEVERAL DOCUMENTS (THE HANDBOOK AND THE UNIT PRESETTING
DOCUMENTS)
CROSS REFERENCES (ex. “see Figure 3 on page 45”) ARE ALWAYS INSIDE THE DOCUMENT
WHERE YOU ARE, AND ARE REFERRED TO THE DOCUMENT PAGES (NOT TO THE PDF FILE
PAGE NUMBERING).
PRINTING
BESIDES TAKING INTO ACCOUNT THE STATEMENTS GIVEN IN “NAVIGATION”, TAKE INTO
ACCOUNT THAT:
– PDF FILE PAGES 515 TO 624 ARE FORMATTED FOR RECTO PRINTING
– PDF FILE PAGES 625 TO 634 ARE FORMATTED FOR RECTO/VERSO PRINTING (PAGE
633/634 IS THIS PAGE).
• GO ON THE FIRST PAGE TO PRINT AND TAKE NOTICE OF THE PDF FILE PAGE
NUMBER
• GO ON THE LAST PAGE TO PRINT AND TAKE NOTICE OF THE PDF FILE PAGE
NUMBER
BRANCHING DRAWINGS
THE DOCUMENTS CONTAINING BRANCHING DRAWINGS (REFERRED TO IN THE
’HANDBOOK ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS’ ) ARE NOT INCLUDED IN THIS PDF FILE (FOR
THEIR SIZE). THEY ARE INDIVIDUALLY PRESENT AS PDF FILES IN THE SAME DIRECTORY
OF THIS WEB SITE.
END OF FILE